Home

2012 Chrysler 300 SRT8 Owner Manual

1. audio Front Heated Seat Operations Uconnect Touch 8 4 and 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect Touch display Controls Soft Key 030939992 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF Moro 030941975 Heated Seats Soft Keys NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HI level If the HlI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Rear Heated Seats On
2. 329 D Automatic Transmission 329 HKevless Enter NO 4 seas eee Sse ar OE i use 330 O Normal Skatte see Ke eek eee ee seas 330 D Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F Or 29 C i usq ER TREE 332 O If Engine Fails To Start 5 9c eR axe d 992 MANE Ore x 5x Ho RE ER RA RR ERE Ee ee 333 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 333 Bl Automatic Transmission H Key Ignition Park Interlock O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System O Five 5peed Automatic Transmission sie RIN ES ca se eoe ER EE EE EN is ARE OE ube oo EE O Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or Console Mounted Shifter por Mode RP 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 345 mP eeoloid EN iow acest SERE c qs PP ES RO 345 VIACOM s ao aru RE E OOR EDE R RC end 345 N Driving Through Water 346 O Plowing Rising Water se doc ee aka s 346 O Shallow Standing Water 346 Mi Power Steering 0 348 O Power Steering Fluid Check esee 349 aM Parking Brake se one uen vd o9 9 oux es 350 Mi Brake System 0 000000 352 O Anti Lock Brake System y 14 lt 604 244444 lt 353 W Electronic Brake Control System 355 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 305 H Traction Control System TCS 356 U Brake Assist System BAS 60 us 64 emnt 356 O Electronic Stability Contr
3. 370 N INDEX 537 Tire Identification Number TIN 368 Tire Mei ES nes OER HPRAR DRR HR EDE 365 Tire Safety Information sess eee aod nde RA ASE 365 TIRGE 2252x999 2 ee oe Ene ton car ic Pe 406 Ties asse cos bes Gee Geese d E 84 374 517 Agne Lile of VINES a vous ea dee ese eoe RE 379 Air TISSU u s dure nage ee RE Red os a urs 374 an 2444444404 lt b ne dhe ETIES N 381 EMS INS wcsuews ok 9993 39 35 417 420 Flat CHANGIN uae ees sone c a aoro Boden 417 General Information sie DE s dc de ER Ces 374 Te Deed PC 377 Inflation Pressures cas so mows on pepe nana 375 JE EIN Sas gdog VERRE EDE He 419 420 Lite DF HOS iseer RE 379 Load Capacity 44 6444404 deter DER S os 370 371 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 383 Pressure Wartung Lint srr ke eek 268 Qualy Grade 3 449 409 doct ohare dees 517 Kadil 22 294 29952599592 95 5924 25 35 377 Replacement os sor Go bee Bees S P 379 ROGTON see 8 424068 AE ROOS NS OE 382 cc e rarer RERA EP KEEL ae 365 374 wi Backs E E E ee 366 opdie IE soos ap on Feo ee aes Hoe oe EHO S 417 PINS Gs bene Ge bas AUS eee eee EST 377 Tread Wear Indicators 378 M DAT RC sy ceeeeee she sd SR EE HE RS 401 Behind a Motorhome 401 Disabled Vehicle 13 ice m gom oem BY EE 433 Recreational i2 er 644 SR ESAE 401 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 401 Traction Control 2 usua eR ESTEE EE Ed s 356 Tider TOWING T sun egos nears 401 Tra
4. 68 Outside The Vehicle 84 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedure in Starting And Operating for further information Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote
5. Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints
6. N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 WARNING The Cruise Control system has two control modes You should switch off the ACC system e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an Aa appropriate distance between vehicles e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations Normal fixed speed cruise control mode is for cruis e g in highway construction zones ing at a constant preset speed For additional informa When entering a tum lane or highway off ramp tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control when driving on roads that are winding icy Mode in this section snow covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system 1 DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 3 SET 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF
7. Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 368 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicl
8. 00000 443 eie ASE eee tee ET ae es 470 Gross Axle Weight Rating aso ed kh Og e 400 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 400 1 P E HERE E HE 400 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow onde Waler oax hacscaeoh hae DERS 346 Hazard Warning Flasher sus a xum rac 405 Head dSeStEalfllo sie aie BAR A ar ERIS Oe 161 Is NH ECC 161 Headlight Washers s sses oca sesa sopore m dora 453 Padu NO D oan ee aus 481 PUIOMIGNG siek ae voit ESE RA P T 171 Bulb Replacement s sss cee eee a ae nen ma 481 RIGGING nes SE SOR E CE EE d AR SOR 470 ID eo aas GEREIS ARE DEERE EA ER EE 172 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 176 Lenis On Reminder 3222222 09x99 ms 174 OD MET Wels Gs 133 HERE AAR ES 172 102 lc c PC M 176 528 INDEX M ele 2504 65 642 eo AS AAI Grete ees 171 Tune Del soa oe peste AAR PORE SUIS T 172 Washers oa dates ae inr OER EDE DEE 453 Heated Mirrors ees 96 el ele RAAR OOS AE gre d Sur 156 Heater Engine Block 46404 6 064560 eae N 333 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 176 Hill Start Assist 0 000 000 000 361 Holder COM vuuess9emuwue x RES ed ues 255 Holdi CUP Dr 252 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 231 Ignition 4o MMC 12 VGC ENUY Gass 94 meer Siria Ro 9 Rex dcs 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key 4545444 bee FR RE 15 Infant Restraint nauau aaa 69 70 Information Center Vehicle 0 277 Instrument Clust
9. 193 CCUDBOIdOIS a4 ess Kie HR AR E ERR ost 252 471 Customer Assistance erre ereit keraren 511 Data Recorder Event 0 000048 68 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 180 Daytime Running Lights 345624604004 dee 174 Pealt eE uuo v eee er ERR US VE V Vue E E E 442 Deck Lid Emergency Release sagre eter DR ms 41 Deck Lid Power Release 39 Defroster Rear Window 260 Defroster Windshield 83 319 Delay Intermittent Wipers 181 Diagnostic System Onboard 440 Dimmer Switch Headlight 176 Dipsticks Oil Engine Power Steering 524 INDEX M Disabled Vehicle Towing 2s ss se 1x rs Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant ENCING OU PR Door LOCKS a gad eie Ge eae HOP EN Oo uid d Door Locks Automatic Door Opener EE ores edd ERO HPRURERSSS Driving En lippER SUIER aces shed yee E a Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Stande Waler sosio 1e 8 175 Boe CP OS Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets LL Electronic Brake Control System Antt Lock Brake System oos EE v ERES Brake Assist Systemi aue vice medo eres Traction Control System ue 4444445444249 356 Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses 472 Electronic Speed Control
10. 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the front and headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On
11. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405 NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat 406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ee e Youcan also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNINCG You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open th
12. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 e An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of the in strument cluster when using AutoStick to alert the driver to upshift to the next gear The UPSHIFT message will appear when approaching the maximum engine speed WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury Auto e If AutoStick is engaged while in Auto mode the transmission will automatically shift up if maximum engine speed is reached e Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal may generate an automatic downshift for improved acceleration e This mode should be used for most driving situations Sport e If AutoStick is engaged while in Sport mode the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is reached e Engine overspeed protection is achieved through fuel 5 cut off at or near redline e This mode will provide aggressive shifting and is intended for spirited driving SPORT MODE This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled dampening system This system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving situations including cornering 344 STARTING AND OPERATING acceleration and braking There are two modes of opera tion e Automatic Auto Mode This is the defaul
13. Automatic Dimming Mirror N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts NOTE This feature is also available on the passenger s side when equipped with turn signal and approach lighting Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and approach lighting contain four LEDs which are located in the upper outer corner of each mirror 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
14. DE as e Headlight Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Underst
15. Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle 2 To Exit Remote Start Mod
16. Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column EI xj ma S gt bust OFF c NS 7 EO t 1 KM War P WIPER e LO 031563008 Multifunction Lever 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn sig
17. mm 248 577 6215 Voicemail Add from Mobile Empty a Mom s Cell NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to remove an existing favorite 3 From the Phone main screen select phonebook From the phonebook screen select the Favorites soft key and then select the soft key located to the right of the e To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the phonebook record Select an empty entry and touch the Phone main screen on that selected entry When the Options pop up appears To Remove A Favorite 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and then touch the Options soft key e Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to remove 68 qf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 729 Phonebook gt Favorite FUGI fei i 7 Ej Voicemail Ca Remove from Favs van Buddy s Pizza F Mom s Cell Emergency e The Options pop up will display touch Remove from Favs Emergency And Towing Assistance The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot be changed To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these steps e Touch the Phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the Favorites soft key Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites e Touch the Options soft key e Touch th
18. 032433107 The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you NOTE e In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the Uconnect Touch display e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un available screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable
19. 6 MODE NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL e When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory Adaptive To Activate Cruise Control 3 Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in Ready the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready 56789 mi Adaptive Cruise Control Ready To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off 032433097 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden EE LL UR EE 55 oe tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave
20. Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 502 MAI
21. LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should never install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts 4 022636836 LATCH Anchorages Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restra
22. ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 5 SPEED TRANSMISSION If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 Remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is near the bottom of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position without starting the engine engine OFF 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the override tab through the access port on the center con sole 051210780 Shift Lever Override 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the rubber tray in the storage bin N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 433 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground SRT8 MODELS NONE IF Transmission is operable e Transmission in NEUTRAL e 30 mp
23. belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replac
24. celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation a The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Synchronizing ESC If the power supply is interrupted battery 5 disconnected or discharged the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible STARTING AND OPERATING 365 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Tire Markings e Europe
25. l l l l I l l Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK 030440174 BSM Warning Light The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 The area
26. ACC Operation O Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ATO AVi Pr o To Set A Desired ACC Speed s 4er RR H lot Ee enea hes a eae tore DE o To Turn Off O To Resume Speed 4 12 qu RE ose sn os o To Vary The Speed Setting O Setting The Following Distance In ACC D Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 192 196 196 197 198 199 200 200 201 202 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 O Display Warnings And Maintenance o Precautions While Driving With ACC O General Information 2 ug dw esc m D Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode 0 0000 eee B Forward Collision Warning If Equipped ll Parksense Park Assist If Equipped O Parksense GeNSOTS Ji uoa soe DU de ooo oo O Parksense Warning Display D Patksense Display is en x S45 45599445 O Front Park Assist Audible Alerts O Enabling And Disabling Parksense O Service The Parksense Park Assist System 212 214 217 217 218 219 222 222 229 H Cleaning The Parksense System 224 O Parksense System Usage Precautions 224 li Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If EQUIDDCQs ETT O Turning Parkview On Or Off With Touch Sereen Radio ss rs solo oie ret Mi Overhead Console 229 B Front Map Reading Lights 230 O Sunglass Bin Door os ede RARE Gnas 230 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 2
27. Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass
28. Hot symbol once to activate the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant s elbows 035139997 Rear Seat Cupholders Lighted Cupholders If Equipped On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control Refer to Lights in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information Light Ring In Rear Cupholder UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 UAE ILE cO P 7 y STORAGE Glovebox Storage The glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Console Features There is a cubby bin located forward of the shift lever The cubby bin is covered with a push push actuated door Push inward on the door to open it push the door a second time to close it Glovebox Storage Compartment 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Two separate storage compartments are also locate
29. If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 ACC ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 96789 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limi tations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE If ParkSense is enabled at one of these shift lever positions the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense Sens
30. Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement SIRIUS Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirab
31. Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mo
32. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Continued 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Lumbar Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support Power Lumbar Switch E Heated Seats On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The heated seats can be operated using the Uconnect Touch System WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNING Continued el DAS Ww 72 e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates a s against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a 950 HD seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat mm
33. as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result during starting stays on or turns on while in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or driving have the system inspected at an authorized others 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 13 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ies ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 14 Sport Mode This light will illuminate when the sport mode sport is selected This mode provides performance based tuning with improved handling and acceleration through an electronic controlled dampening system This system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving situations includin
34. in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED The Command View sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console 034433149 Command View Sunroof and Power Shade Switches 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof O
35. other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints
36. sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are three 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets on this vehicle The power outlets are protected by a fuse Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Front Power Outlet The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only WARNING when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicle s not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 The center console outlet is powered directly from the There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back of battery power available at all times Items plugged into the center console for rear passengers This power outlet this ou
37. you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Show Time In Status Bar When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understan
38. 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN position the transmission shift lever is in the NEU TRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Control Handle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steeri
39. 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter e Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Personal Settings Linked To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark a
40. 539 Washing Venice ss ii 44404446542 I eed Seb 467 Windshield Defroster su 2164454446444 RE DE 83 Water Windshield Washers 180 182 Drivin TOER e pace SIDE HR eke RS 346 EID EER KT OE EIE d eu rs 453 Wheel and Wheel Trim edu 468 Windshield Wiper Blades 452 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care lt i x 468 Windshield Wipers os ahs Sias ache ded aeta 180 Wind Buffeting oo oo See AAR aud os oo 39242246 Wiper Blade Replacement 452 Window Fogging eus aak RES EE Shee eS ogee 929 Vipers IMEC sie Su KERS DERS ES es 181 liu AP 36 Wipers Rain Sensitive ise tR Rh RR 183 OWE 2584 AR AO PRE ONS dee see 36 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the
41. Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 506 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 507 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter L
42. Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that WARNING has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point e Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard information Using the wrong type of brake fluid or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be Continued taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could
43. Full Off ESC mode is intended for off highway or off road only Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK 362 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver
44. GE EN ETT BG oe Ezg phone When prompted on the phone enter the name LLL Le NC n and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e If No is selected touch the Settings soft key from No phone connected the Uconnect Phone main screen Would you like to pair a phone e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e See Step 4 to complete the process 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 10 10 NW 54 out 68 q FM 91 7 We 72 Bluetooth pairing in progress Please wait 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range Pair Additional Mobile Phones e Touch the More soft key to begin e Touch the Settings soft key e Next touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process sc
45. Heated Seat 25 Amp Rear Windows 10 Amp Airbag Module Red Es Es Ma Ma 54 Fuse Spare _ eee um ME 55 Fuse Spare sys 58 10 Amp Airbag Module Red e se Spare Ee Fase Spare 15 Amp Run Sense Blue 15 Amp Illumination Rear Sun Blue shade Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 5 10 Amp HVAC Module In Car Red Temperature Sensor na 61 62 63 64 65 67 70 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment Irunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578 Vibor Vanity Lampe vs sad RD gor ees A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 Door COMICS oo eee aoa RAD bnew AE 562 Shift Indicator Lamp us eher JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Servi
46. Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park Ing 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020235340 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect Touch system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING CAUTION e When leaving the vehi
47. Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 333 Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
48. ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a par
49. Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac
50. Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
51. Seat Belts 54 Preparation for Jacking Pretensioners Seat Belts Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry Radial Piy DOS ooie oes 9 3o t XR REKE RS Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap Radio Operation Rain Sensitive Wiper System eiue RE Rd 183 Rear Camera 0 SS SS SS ES SS ee eee 226 Rear Cupholier cas seed ooo ges dar d d ad 254 Rear Park Sense System sui sis RR RR 217 Rear Dear Boling sca aria Sore ogee dest ED 164 Rear Window Defroster ls 260 Rear Window Features sen 260 Recorder Event Data llle 68 Recieatonal TONE Vedere Qupd wp vestes 401 Reformulated Gasoline Len 392 ROE errea e teen ana DE ay 450 Reminder LMS OR 424229 REM EER RO HR 174 Reminder Seat Belt SS SE 53 Remote Control Ong stel gaa quinos di 368 9 9 9 Aaa ee eo a 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE se ses es 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 311 Remote btarting bystem serier rert Ari 5204 eu 25 Remote Trunk Release 534 INDEX NEE Id Replacement Bulbs s 344 44345455 RE ipsi ehi 480 Seat Belt Maintenance iis se Pe be ENE Gooey 471 Replacement Keys cues dues 44 pod iei oe eae d 16 Seat Bel RONNA ta cae 399206 4r 49d RESTI 5a Replacement Parts ss esasa si DES EES aeit 442 Seat DEUS o4 45 905 xu e P See riaki 41 45 82 Replacement tes uuu ac kee desc Sp s Roses 379 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 49 Reporting Safety Defects s
52. Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 520 INDEX NEE Id About Your Brakes 350 352 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 999 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 193 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 458 DOCS Fuel 22a ws ORR AAR UE S bas ages 396 Adding Washer PIutd ia 656 4855 xem es eer 453 Additives Fuel bies eae aste Es RR een es ooo 394 Adjustable Pedals ii eint pe bbe od ee nee ges 188 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 446 Air Conditioner Maintenance 449 Air CondiUonIng FIGE s voee esp C 93 5 ecco sg 323 450 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 449 450 Air Conditioning System 320 449 Air Pressure Tires 000000000 ee 375 PUI 2 aa ers ba EL ee eae EE OES 54 64 Altb g Deployment sers oes DEER whee ee RE 65 Albar Light wies O55 24 5 ke ES RR 61 62 67 82 271 Airbase Waintenance sace 3393 gw Abe duh edes 66 ADAL Ide su Rene ood se Gone Sas 58 60 63 64 Airbag Window Side Curtain 58 60 64 Alarm Security IAM usse EES PESE P SUR BEE 17 PCT EP cesse MAER See 272 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alarm PaniG 29 20x93 29x 293 iriso harei 22 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 353 355 Anti Lock Warning Light 272 955 Anti Theft Sec
53. Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Integrated Power Module Fuses 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 Engine Coolant Reservoir 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requ
54. Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini mum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States 644 664 ka ts MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 STARTING AND OPERATING 391 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6 4L Engine The 6 4L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality premium unleaded 800dfab8 gasoline with an
55. Trip Computer functions or press the BACK button to return to the main menu N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON or START position Resetting A Trip Info Function To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions select the function you want to reset using the UP or DOWN buttons Push the SELECT button until the feature dis plays zero Tire PSI Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Tire PSI is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT button and one of the following will be displayed e f tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON e If one or more tires have low pressure Tire Pressure LOW is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON e f the Tire Pressure system requires service Service Tire Pressure System is displayed Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset Press and release the BACK button to return to the main menu 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Vehicle Info Customer Information Fea
56. Voice Command section for direction on how to use the EVR button The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use
57. Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
58. YOUR VEHICLE x NOTE You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen e If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook e Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera
59. are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of 2 the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it o Y 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come
60. au 041236833 Setting The Analog Clock iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch User s Manual HARMAN KARDON Logic7 HIGH PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon audio system with GreenEdge technology that offers superior sound quality higher Sound Pressure Levels SPL and reduced energy consumption The new system utilizes proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver ing substantial increases in component and system effi ciency levels The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power supply and drives a 7 5 channel playback architecture The Harman Kardon audio system offers the ability to choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source The GreenEdge high efficiency speaker designs ensure the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dy namic sound quality The speakers are tuned for maxi mum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier outpu
61. be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In formation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjust able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving Bl CANCFI You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED ON OFF 2 RES When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over E
62. button to return to the main menu Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Miles Per Gallon MPG The Miles Per Gallon MPG feature displays instanta neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE this function cannot be reset Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Cruise Control Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC if equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status of the ACC or Cruise is displayed in the menu line also Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information e If equipped with ACC one of several messages will be displ
63. can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re The restraint must be appropriate for your child s straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy weight and height Check the label on the restraint for ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or weight and height limits fatal injury to the infant e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure
64. controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc C
65. coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re WARNING Continued fer to
66. cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it shou
67. doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle NOTE The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the doors are locked using the door panel switch a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true e The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter e The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the Passive Entry door handles e The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs e There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of either Passive Entry door handle e Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors To Enter The Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the deck lid press the button
68. drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE See Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 517 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to vari
69. drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Continued 382 STARTING AND OPERATING ieee NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation wi
70. ee ee N 0 Headlights On With Wipers Available With O Front Map Reading Lights Automatic Headlights Only 172 Ambient Light esses 178 ET IT ir Antenor LIGMS os sag Seen HARE er d 4 178 ai sa E Hs W Windshield Wipers And Washers 180 mw cuir n Discharge 173 O Intermittent Wiper System 181 4 Daytime Running Lights DRL 174 O Wiper Operauoll a o aai sra ge eed na nese s 181 D Lights On Reminder sss esses 174 O Miot Feature 42 is uS deer vod hen ORDRE 182 2 Fog Lights If Equipped 174 O Windshield Washers ea oe vds e seesi 182 O Multifunction Lever 175 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E 3 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only 182 ORain Sensing WIpers 222744 ER 084 aaa 183 N Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 184 ll Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column If Popped ETT 185 ll Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 186 W Adjustable Pedals 188 lBl Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 190 ETO CHVGIe eae bye ao oa ee ok EAR S yar d 191 O lo Set A Desired Speed 22s aer ua 191 OTO Deactivate aka acce Rue ERE E iskis 191 ELIO Resume Speed 44244444 AD RYE AUR dE 192 O To Vary The Speed Setan ss se ga eae gs 192 o To Accelerate For Passing ll Adaptive Cruise Control ACC I Eanipped us qued RE RES CIR ee DI o Adaptive Cruise Control
71. following beep say Dial 248 555 1212 e Ignore e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number e Hold unhold 248 555 1212 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Mute unmute Transfer the call to from the phone e Press the S button to begin Swap 2 active calls e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call John Doe Mobile e Join 2 active calls together e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Touch Tone Number Entry Recent Calls e Touch the Phone soft key a may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the ollowing call types e Touch the Dial soft key 68 qf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out VW 72 e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed Recent calls gt All Ca X e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and 27 Ana Conda a ice touch Call 37 Axel Schweiss 5 Buddy s Pizza To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the VR button while in a call and say Send 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook X 248 990 6543 d James Buttler 2 D Dennett e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e All Calls These can be accessed by touching
72. for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH WARNING
73. gears To engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the right or left while in the DRIVE position or press one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles When AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift when manually selected by the driver using the shift lever or the shift paddles unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho sen except as described below e The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop e You can start out in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions e The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right or press and hold the shift paddle until D is once again displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal
74. i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Ex amples of this message type are Memory System Un available Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC White Telltales This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The selected AutoStick gear is displayed as 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 and indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS fe
75. in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in
76. in the locked up or folded down nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When position should not be used as a play area by the seats are folded down they provide a continuous children when the vehicle is in motion They could nearly flat extension of the load floor be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint When the seatback is folded to the upright position make system sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 WARNING Continued e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Pu
77. indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 493 Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator At Each Stop for Fuel message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In required strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom et
78. is responsible for braking the vehicle Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to follow these warnings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle object or person and cause serious or fatal injury Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NS TA TING AND OPERATING 363 Ready Alert Braking Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support
79. is in REVERSE or when the Park Assist vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected System 3 Park Assist 032741296 Park Assist System Off 032763177 Park Assist System ON 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous Park Assist 0327412599 Slow Tone Park Assist Fast Tone 032741298 Park Assist 032741297 Continuous Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING ALERTS Rear a Greater a 79 39 in 39 24 in 24 14 in Less than 14 in in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 60 cm 60 35 cm 35 cm Front Distance Greater than 47 39 in 39 24 in 24 14 in Less than 14 in in cm 47 in 120 cm 120 100 cm 100 60 cm 60 35 cm 35 cm Audible Alert single 1 2 sec Slow Chime prone ene as for rear only for rear only pare Nome C dine 3 Slow Flashing 2 Slow Flashing 1 Slow Flashing ontinuous Front Park Assist Audible A
80. is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE e Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions e Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter if linked to the memory feature to recall memory positions 1 or 2 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The memory seat switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch consists of three buttons The S button which is used to activate the memory save function and the 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles d 1S 031036877 Memory Seat Switch Programming The Memory Feature To create a new memory profile perform the following 1 Place the ignition into the RUN position 2 Adjust all memory prof
81. it climbs As the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display Gauges 1 When selected this screen displays the following values e Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the gauge e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Battery Voltage Shows the actual battery voltage Gauges 2 When selected this screen displays the following values e Coolant Temperature Shows the actual coolant temperature within the range of the gauge e Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the gauge e Transmission Temperature Shows the actual transmission temperature within the range of the gauge e Intake Air Temperature Shows the actual intake air temperature within the range of the gauge e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Battery Voltage Shows the actual battery voltage Engine When selected this screen displays miles per hour mph horsepower hp torque ft lb oil pressure psi and gear selector values Handling When selected this screen displays peak g force instan taneous g force steering and yaw angles Options When selected this screen allows you to choose a stan dard or customize display for your SRT home page SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button until the setting is correct UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
82. lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you
83. lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position NS TA TING AND OPERATING 339 e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever WARNING will not move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the trans Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ee DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving c
84. ll Harman Kardon Logic79 High Performance Multichannel Surround Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS If EGUIDDEG 12933 939 med ees ORE i ds W Steering Wheel Audio Controls on Eddie Opel ocu 9 309 iem Poe oh e mr s 912 EED Plet A TO la N CD DVD Disc Maintenance SS ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 313 W Climate Controls lees 314 O General Overview esee 314 O Climate Control Functions ol o Automatic Temperature Control ATC 320 HO pers IPS eei reo TERG BRODE d 321 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 3 19 PA A i DO OEE DOOO YOO Air Outlet 8 Uconnect Touch System Hard Controls 15 Dimmer Controls 2 Instrument Cluster 9 SD Memory Card Slot 16 Hood Release 3 Hazard Switch 10 Power Outlet 17 Headlight Switch 4 Uconnect Touch System 11 CD DVD Slot 18 Analog Clock 5 Climate Control Hard Controls 12 Storage Compartment 19 Paddle Shifters 6 Glove Compartment 13 Engine Start Stop Button 7 ESC Off Switch 14 Trunk Release Button 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040340810 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the re
85. nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your WARNING abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug internal injury in an accident The belt forces belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but accident across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straig
86. next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Steering Directed Lights When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu
87. note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens e Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 e If the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service e Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Servi
88. nsimisslOfb 4640444 0 42 446 65 DAE ees 464 Automatic iis sav ERG RE wearers 334 335 464 PIS 2529222900429 EE doe eee eu 489 SEINE Pm 334 538 INDEX M Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transporting Pets Tread Wear Indicators Trip Odometer Trunk Lid Deck Lid Trunk Release Remote Control Trunk Release Emergency Turn Signals UCI Connector xd ac aca db ger ORR Ced ROS 309 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 517 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 309 Universal Transmitter llssn 231 Unleaded Gasoline SS SS SS SS 391 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 50 Varro NOS 24 tart eo odo Ped ee HAS were e Mi 96 Vehicle Certification Label ees Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Nemicle LOANS ius x asp 06 6 39 os 371 399 401 Vehicle Modifications Alterations Vehicle OMG P 322 480 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Viscosity Engine OU 44e deer He ater Bede 445 Warning Flasher Hazard asset x es 405 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 267 Warnings and CauOfls sis pe qoae racine in 6 Warranty Information 05 514 Washer ROCCE iesus pbi Stee ES ERA SES 453 Washers Windshield 182 453 N INDEX
89. octane rating of 91 or higher RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 9 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties 392 STARTING AND OPERATING ee necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are requ
90. off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings NOTE e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Recirculation When outside air contains smoke odors or c high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Mix Floor and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if these modes are selected Attempt ing to use Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC
91. on the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution 334 STARTING AND OPERATING M AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some thing Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle Continued speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 335 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a
92. on the right side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit i ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft 1 0 m of the Outside Door Handle Lock Button deck lid 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door WINDOWS trim panel which operate the passenger door windows Power Windows The window control
93. one v P3929 91964 2 EE 329 Temperate GAUE RS ER RR ERAS ees 275 Eise OI VISCOSIDY ase gyar EEA 445 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 64 Entry System Illuminated 0 20 Eli el aas oe ROAD ees KEN OR ee AE 392 Event Data Recorder ssirirerirresereiseex 68 Exhaust Gas Caution lt s lt is ese RR RSS 81 395 Exhaust SVSICM causes PEE Rr bie PERS 81 454 Extetior Folding Mirtos 293 wey eret DORS PERE 93 EXISHOI LIS UNIS iwuip ace suritarten Sed aos awe 171 PECOT tun e TE Ped eR PEST S 84 Filer EOSADOBCPU AR ME EE ad i 271 Filters Pit CleaVCl ia a ba READ MEE e ME BES 446 Ait COUGIMONING easkers 965444 448 4 323 450 seran Dm 446 488 Poeme Oil Disposal aca xe hs 445 Flash To Pass 526 INDEX NEE id Flashers Forward Collision Warning 214 281 Hazard Wali oes anes eee ot BERE 405 Freeing A Stuck Vel ele auae sr egre eas 430 TU OI Yee tages AD dat N DEE 04176207 Fel 32 eeeseo ees soe e eee tees 391 Plat Tire Changing usuoea Race dene ER EDE EE ao 417 ole vb M 40h ape ek ae ohne eae es 394 Hooded Engine Starting isa voc erbe Ne aue 332 AA os lees r AE HA E 392 Hoortoisole x curans ARIE HR UR Rari DER RA AS 209 CONSEIVING nes vas aa SR EERDER DS 286 Puid OP AGINGS ous oen anne oe EROR MA atti 487 Ethanol oie eR oes eee eee ee es 392 Fluid Leaks au ice dut oed eR arte d deg rdg e 84 Filler Door Gas Cap 2 264444 dede i e de Ae 271 Fluid Level Checks erro P EE EET OT 991 Automatic Trans
94. only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 and are approved to MB 229 3 or MB 229 5 will be listed on the back label of the oil container The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic 5W 40 or equivalent engine oil N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded c
95. or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 021337430 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio
96. right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru ment panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch display Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time 10 10 DIV 54 ou GR af Fm a1 7 Settings Display Clock Safety amp Driving Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Uconnect Touch 8 4 Soft Keys 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the
97. s ox os arae es 514 And Pregnant Women iste tdt aciem y w 54 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 268 285 Child Restraint 69 70 71 78 Restraint Head ike ta RE EHS BO 161 Extender Sita cues be che CARES BAD A AE 54 Restraints Child 00 000000 69 Front Seat i m 99333 ERE EO RS 45 46 Restraints Occupant usus dores HEDE dene ds 41 INSPCCHON su way AARDE SE eueae ese us 82 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck lesu 430 Operating Instricllons use secedere OA 46 Rotation lires xu eue 64 wie dos Sow eso S EP dea 382 Pretensioners uos o sa 6 Xo dome oyente cy Ze nd 52 IKE ia A eT 45 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle s usur m 82 Untwis ng Procedure 454 se su ne xs sag son 50 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle WE eo ose beh Foe ek bees She oe 153 Safety Detects Reporting 2422s os ks 400 s 514 AdjustaeRE 2424205500 Re DERE EER aeons 153 Safety Information HE esvi cine ER RE RD as 365 Peasy END 244554048 US PESE XA PERS 168 Daley IDS sie tut oe RES E TES EROPS d dE s 81 Heid Restraints ss ees 24556554544 peg 161 Pale Exhaust GaS 2246444404464 SEE P EPI RS 81 Inizio PPP TD 156 behedule Maintenance iss ar AR hsc bee ge 492 Liesl Adusien xeasorackdobdes 93 298 E 159 N INDEX 535 NMICMOLY Seen eG sok ERAS RE ERES Sd 4s 165 POW oe a OER RA BA EER 155 Red PONS aa pad doc d ee up eens HR 164 Seatback Release eee 164 WHOIS aes toes oes eet AE REA M EUER 153 Security A
98. satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 dit DEERE EEA ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR ABNDOW WINOSME D WIPER EXTERION PULS AKH BEAM TURN SIGMALS 3 oy pe ELECTRON PROGRAM BRAKE WEER INTERMITTENT FAILURE EPEED CONTROL ay eg 5s on ZO e oO 1 FUEL REAR WINDOW WWDSHELO MASTER LIGHTING Seen UPPER AO LOWER HEATED BEAT WWDOW LIFT VRE PRESEURE WEL BERENT wisi ARINC WTERMETTENT WIPER WASHER Serr HIGH eee sore C KR a 0575aJ52 93 29 LI FUEL FILL SEE FEAR WINDOW WDSHIELD WASHER DUWE LIGHT FRONT POS UGNT HOOO RELEASE LOWER fun ALL WHEEL HARMSE OF AM LUR WASHER FLUID LEVEL DOW DONN Dr roe MI DAWE ERAXING SYSTEM Y 200 QE ET fe JA awo BRAKE me UFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC ERANE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW CLOCTRICALL PAIK LIGHTS KLAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE UESMUSI AND VENTLATWEFAN WW OW LOCH THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WATS PARKING DEFRIIST HEATED GEN LOWER AR QUTLET CONTROL DR
99. seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag e Knee Impact Bolster e Driver Advanced Front Air Bag e Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e Supplemental Side Air Bag I
100. should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Access Door 2 Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 LERAAR Ak ka AA AAN Filter Access Cover A C Air Filter 3 Remove the used filter 5 Close the filter access cover 4 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals vehicle text
101. speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the origi
102. take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx id WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Standard Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Inner Park Lamp and Outer Park Lamp 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise 3 Park Turn Lamp Bulb eb 1 High Beam Headlamp Bulb 2 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface c
103. the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e f the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
104. the extended weather or Show five day forecast or Show sports league screen For example you can say Show ski info to get other forecasts MLB headlines or Show PGA headlines 4 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face 2 You can replace Headlines with any menu items and shaded grey shown on a league screen For example you can say Show NFL Schedule and results or Show NCAA Basketball AP top 25 or Show Major League Baseball Teams 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button q amp VR an the steering wheel Navigation PI ne Route ayer Home screen will shown on the touch screen Cancels listening to Guidance Prompt is repeated your voice command 030003040 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 NOTE 3 Navigation commands only work if equipped with 1 Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles Navigation 2 You can replace Player with Radio Navigation 4 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face Phone Climate More or Settings and shaded grey 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Navigation Universal Commands Thus cesrimemo can be spear an any scraum whan nol d
105. the fitting at the end of the hose 3 Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the N WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 413 Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn On the TIREFIT kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if avail able Make sure the engine i
106. the ignition and lock your vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking number of reasons A child or others could be brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise seriously or fatally injured Children should be the load on the transmission locking mechanism may warned not to touch the parking brake brake make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The pedal or the shift lever parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Continued 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued CAUTION e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be cert
107. the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 18 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 19 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ig
108. the vehicle by jacking on jack locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a Instructions for this vehicle jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic 060641851 Jack Warning Label Jacking Locations 422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 2 If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange Front Jacking Location 060641515 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire dad dd Add dd EE EG GN Gee 6 Remove the lug nuts and tire 7 Mount the spare tire Rea
109. through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard heys or soft keys as follows NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M position Blower control should be left in the ON position to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the vehicle Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 4 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 5 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated o
110. to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does n
111. transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob with Remote x2 Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob P may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e HAZARD switch off e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Battery at an acceptable charge level 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e RKE PANIC button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active Ignition in OFF position WARNINCG e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death
112. user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Uconnect Voice Command EVR button N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are avail able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Com mand EVR button Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command Sve button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Starting Voice Recognition VR Session in Radio Player Modes In this mode you can say the following commands NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Command EVR button 3 Disc To switch to the disc mode say Change source to Disc This command can be given in any mode or screen e Track t to change the track 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Voice Tree Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio available commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing VR after pushing the Uconnect voice command butte
113. vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or Power Door Hack BWN ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock featur
114. you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger _ ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage
115. 0 247 9753 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 513 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three wee
116. 1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 508 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd per hues Gas ERROR SEL DIG AAR 511 O Prepare For The Appointment oll df te dies Hi 46444 fener dae ae ade rri d 511 o Be Reasonable With Requests 511 N If You Need Assistance Lee 511 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 512 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 512 Hn Medco Contactes ss a Ee AD RAS Vor S 512 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 513 A Seve CONOCI uos uc ua ie we se sees oes 3 513 Mi Warranty Information 514 EM MOPAR Parts sos xd ee eee ts 51
117. 4 N Reporting Safety Defects 514 O In The 50 United States And Washington BENE OM oer ee eee ee ee ee O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 510 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie H Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Traction Grades was REDE BR tuns AT RSS 517 Quality eur se ie GE Re DI oO Treadwear eet be eae Oe PRS OES EE Y Remus 517 O Temperaire Grades ge inp oa oh ED ee AE 518 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 511 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you
118. 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 FLUID CAPACITIES Metric O Fuel Approximate 12 xm Engine Oil with Filter 6 4 Liter Engine SAE 5W 40 Synthetic API Certified Cooling System 6 4 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 15 2 Quarts 14 4 Liters Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operat ing conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 and are approved to MB 229 3 or MB 229 5 The manufacturer recom mends the use of a full synthetic 5W 40 or equivalent engine oil Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs LZTR6AP11EG Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part pila Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed epa HM product Brake
119. 480 Lill ot gauss poe ogee oh eye eae oe 84 171 Luo P 61 62 67 82 271 DIU 464447055 oe ou oboe ee ae ose ae 272 POH LOCK os ea 649054 KERR ER RE ss 272 900 Automauc Headlights sauce posse dd r 171 Brake Assist Warning 005 363 Brake Warning 26 4406 4 5 lt 8 e364 24 x 273 352 bulb Replacement uia sce 544 5 mets 480 481 D yume KAREE oase tas esaaeeta frs 174 Dimmer Switch Headlight 175 176 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 363 EXIGO preasan taak ace Dora e Vol EAE ion 84 POS gaa OT EET oca EE OT 174 267 Hazard Warning Flasher ss ge ERA ER Rs 405 els elite ee oie ARE nian CER ies 3g nt 171 HEAO uoce decia pa io ed AE EE EES 171 481 Headlights On Reminder 1 22 25 5e08cen8 lt 174 Headlights On With Wipers 172 182 Eg BEAM io es RE RER RD amp SE Re eS 176 High Beam Indicator ses Ee MERE 549684 High Beam Low Beam Select 530 INDEX NEE Id Muminated B 424 2408 se a4e 265 BR 20 Instrument Cluster Ls 171 IHODSID COMUOL oud fey d ed ep Ep uti OR 179 MOTION PPM 178 IE 42 524 ana mind AE ER ee ee AD 486 Liehis On Reminder 2222 gni 174 louwubH l bases 3 3 ee Hee Ad S RSS 281 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 270 MER eli 93 OO AE EE TE DT 177 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 180 Pas n PCT 176 Reading 245 5464243 488404445494 177 230 Seat Belt Reminder each 275 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 272 Service lees 480 481 Service E
120. 5 CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age e
121. 91 oO Before You Begin Programming Homen I 232 D Programming A Rolling Code 232 O Programming A Non Rolling Code 234 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M D Canadian Gate Operator Programming 236 O Sunshade Operation io REK RAD RSS 242 ELI HOHER uis soe voa iN m EG 207 Eb id DUE ID sos eg eat oa RE RE DE t 242 El OUD PT 237 O Sunroof Maintenance 242 oO Troubleshooting Tips ascen o ER RE ys 238 O Ignition Off Operation 242 Hi General nformallob 259 99 ES negates 239 W Commandview Sunroof With Power Shade Bi Power Sunol eed soe none 239 IC EOUIDDOd 45 4 bie EES a TRES RE PERS se 243 pO pene N N 240 O Opening Sunroof Express 244 7 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 240 D Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 244 A Closing Sunroof Express 240 oO Closing Sunroof Express 244 3 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 241 B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 245 O Pinch Protect Feature sa su 4 40 241 ea IE a 0 Pinch Protect Override wasser WED 241 OPE OUE Ar MES OS eau dg O Venting Sunroof Express 241 O Closing Power Shade Express 245 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 O Closing Power Shade Manual Mode 243 EE OR ES OE ER hese ees 255 O Pinch Protect Teale so se RE OR DON AS 246 DE lovebo ss lol BC eu ED eat SOR RR di 255 A
122. 979401 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored
123. ADER DOK OER 81 Child Restraint ss ske amp ie 2 Bea ok 69 70 71 74 78 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 73 74 Child ate LOCKS 446 4405 MED RERR DEL DIE AAN 31 Clean Air GasOune s 24s ee 65 42454 ERG HOSES 392 Cleaning ig rm 468 Windshield Wiper Blades 452 Cate ONO 4245464 x xc the bee ea ARE 314 aol 309 Com Holder 444s EX RE AUR RE SES 255 Cold Weather Operation 2 eode duce dee sens 992 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 313 Computer INpP Tavel ies PEAK ER RR Pi 288 Ne INDEX 523 Connector DEL AAR DEE AAK OR OK HE OE DOE 309 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 309 Conservine Fuel ses kas decease Wie Re Ve RR 286 Console Floor CT TERT RET ee eae aoe 255 Console Overhead sewe rmm 229 Contract Service 42545444 Eua Coweta dU a EUR 513 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 459 Si ide ES SEE EE tie esd ces 456 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 458 Coclan Gand ci a be Foods deo eee die 487 Coolant Level 42252353244 bek ER x43 457 460 Disposal of Used Coolant 460 Drain Flush and Refill 457 INSPCCHON C AA KEER RR ae aa 460 Points to Remember 4 4654 4 440648 45 461 Pressure Cay uos osse ene DOER fone eres 459 Radiator ED 44496 7146 5Gos eos iti 459 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 457 487 488 Corrosion Protech x 542 22h du eere PME 466 Cruise Control Speed Control
124. ARNING Continued Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The system The air bag may inflate accidentally or Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal I may not function properly if modifications are circuits and interconnecting wiring associated made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer with air bag system electrical components While the air for any air bag system service If your seat includ bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during manufacturer approved seat accessories may be the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system first cycled to the ON RUN position for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gau
125. ATC Hard keys are located in the center of the instru ment panel Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 9 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons 6 7 10 11 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect Touch System Set tings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower sp
126. CHRYSLER 2012 ZOO OWNER S MANUAL SRT s8 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your percep tions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judg ment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured Copyright 2011 Chrysler Group LLC o m O REE
127. Cruise Control 190 193 Electronic Stability Control ESC ss 357 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC sic ne bu ewe eae een ade ores 220 277 Emergency Deck Lid Release sexe teca reu 41 Emergency Trunk Release 2 hh de ts 41 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 430 Hazard Warning Flasher 2 lt ciadusac te aus 405 EIS oa RA er E ES ERES 417 JU EIE sss ie a na n8 3 97 os PA 426 ei an EA OIE ROLE EE 405 lvi aa aa aoe Ae eae Gee ee ease 433 Emission Control System Maintenance 440 ln 50 C EE ET EE TT 439 Pit a scissa Ste PCR PERS 446 bloes Heater ass dour ES iba KES MP S 333 N INDEX 525 Break In Recommendations 80 Checking Oid Level so se MAR kka tiii 444 KOP MERE sos oes der eed Wo AA a drin 439 Coolant Antifreeze EE 457 488 COOUMG 2419099 vua d SE A eap te ban ages 456 Exhaust Gas Caution 81 395 Fails dO Start 2303052333 2499942 0309 8 54 332 Flooded Diamine serres cire OAR i taai 332 Piel Regui MENS serrare eee RD dep d oei 391 JUMP DEED a sa AO e S RW Bop day iad 426 B ges ee eee eee ee RE oe ee ee 444 487 488 Olu Chance Interval 424 2a a brem ed 285 444 SOM Piet Cap T 445 Did Pier 2c ed xS 3554 SARA ER dE deg s 446 Oil Filter Disposal uua d ie eret a qn eo qo ncs 445 Oil Selection 5 3 409444 A RUE 6045 45494 444 487 OILS yee 45 2 onse Gees EROR ee bi 445 OVA DEANN sos ORE ens IERE setae ys 405 aR Ed AA
128. D player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation w
129. DE e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION 43 38 99 5055 04 084064 S04 ee DR THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION See INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your
130. DING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the park ing lights or headlights are on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the RUN position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031439995 Windshield Wiper Washer Control NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double
131. Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis motion connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires You or others can be badly burned by hot engine disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If testing or for prolonged periods during very rough you see or hear steam coming from under the idle or malfunctioning operating conditions hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber
132. E REY 28 OPower Door Locks usce ences ocn ay ae s EUR CER 29 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOCS MEER OON EET ET ERE 31 W Keyless Enter N Go 000 0005 32 E Windows METER IE EE EE RE eens 36 O ower WNdOwWS se ex 3 edv p om Be eo Rene SR 36 O Wind Buffetng ue oos sae EE EE ak AR ER 99 W Trunk Lock And Release ee 39 W Trunk Safety Warning 4 40 O Irunk Emergency Release 422542242644 HE 41 W Occupant Restraints 000 41 El Lap Shoulder DENS cu iu ieu ede bc ine rare 45 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 50 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 50 o Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR IE POUIPPCO Mines 445 635545 OF oe os 51 O Energy Management Feature 52 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Heil Belt Pretensioner aco suse n eos wa as 52 EG ld bes ONS 4 55 5 3 99 99 RR o RE E 69 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 80 BeltAlert ee EE nnne is IN UD TIPS ge cee eae ERUNT RAD E OS 81 I H Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 24 O Transporting Passengers 81 ci Seat Belt Extender lt ca ede eReERuA ux 54 ee ee N NN 81 eee E O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Bags eene a pou T oa oe REDE Eie ee ed EO RR 82 O Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 60 3 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Event Data Recorder EDR
133. Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 The most common causes are e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains R lt di i la
134. Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Troubleshooting Tips WARNING If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door to complete the training for a Rolling Code opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ten e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without If you have any problems or require assistance please these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 call tol
135. HICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle N WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 431 NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further information CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener
136. IVE BRAAF r jj TOW Ut m gt b HAUL BATTERY HEATED MRHOR WWOSHELD INSTRUMENT PAWEL SEAT BELT SLENG DIT TE AR CONDITIONING CHILO SEAT NECOCAMION WA DATWC TOW MALI CHARGING DETROST ILLUMINATION TERR ANCOR SUTTON E N 4 66 A W Cu br NS J w A Low URE ANON ANOHOSE GLOW PLUG POWER WMDSHIELO WEER JUE ARBAG ARNa sua 0008 MOONMELT MAZANI FOUR EEL STEERING FUIN AND WASHER CHLOREN LU LATCH BIITTON ORWE LOW SRS N id A c CY e aE amsaa AV Aa SS p n PUSH SF MALFUNCTION ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL FASSENGER DOOR ALAR COWVERTIELE Cole SEE OWNERS Am ELECTRONIC INDICATOR LIGHT on Tema TEMPERATUPE RESTWANTSYSTEM AMAAG OFF Tor DOWN MANUAL SO CONDGIONER CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 010805185 VIN Location The vehicle identificati
137. M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your
138. MT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT 394 STARTING AND OPERATING ee can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor SS ON Eon AE nia reformulated gasoline e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor Materials Added To Fuel mance and damage the emissions control system All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine
139. Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Rear Axle MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent with MOPAR Friction Modifier Hypoid Gear Additive MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl Maintenance Schedule 492 O Required Maintenance Intervals 494 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound
140. NTENANCE SCHEDULES M 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs mE Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if Replace the air conditioning filter necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles Inspect the exhaust system equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 503 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil
141. OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition is placed into the RUN position NOTE The approach lighting will not function when the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding You
142. P Protect Override acsi ht esas 246 OC Console Featates sies px ERRARE EP 255 O Wind DUIS serr erie oh eee E 246 O Door Storage nada ete he yee aes pE O Sunroof Maintenance isse En seo aes 246 D Rear Seat Armrest Storage If Equipped Blenition Off Operation sis seis et kias 247 O Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped With 60 40 O Sunroof Fully Closed ao ET EEE e W Electrical Power Outlets 0 247 ae ET oss cupstits W Cupholders Pm 252 am a A ian oen qe ad O Front Seat Cupholdets oe erem 252 OE ra taan any oe ad S Rear Seat Cupholders isses es 254 W Rear Window Features 260 O Rear Window Defroster 260 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM Mir CAUTION Automatic Dimming Mirror This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle 030436523
143. P monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode
144. PERATING ee The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The console mounted shift lever provides PARK RE VERSE NEUTRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift posi tions Once the shifter is in DRIVE tapping the shift lever side to side or pressing the paddle shifters will place the vehicle in AutoStick AutoStick allows for manual shift control refer to AutoStick in this sec tion While in AutoStick the transmission gear position will be displayed in the EVIC Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill appl
145. ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected When backing up it is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense when using the ParkSense Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e Before using the ParkSense Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warming display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and h
146. Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 Loading To load your vehicle properly first fi
147. Re YOU DER CR ER RR 445 bic e 95 oon acne cae 445 487 Onboard Diagnostic System iussa d de ie es 440 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 291 Operating PIeCauHONs 4545454044544 ES De 440 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors less 92 Overdrive aas ERAS ED BENE RR ORR SN 341 Overdrive OFF Switch cwsee ux nas SEE DRS 341 Overhead Console 00002 eee eee 229 Overheating Engine uw 42 034 on bod cao os 276 405 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 515 Paint Care SS SS nes 466 Pane Alarm due bos ended 6s yews Bae aoe XS 22 Park Sense System Rear coins cc4 ien he eens 217 Darse Drake esperien 99 9 oa DEE dE DUE E 350 kid AA SEER d ey P EOS ees na RNR 176 Pedals AdWistable ics mas re RR RR We esos 188 PCRS Gil gap NAI RN SN PERE OE a ee 80 Placard Tire and Loading Information 370 Power DKCS ceres kepe eo ee ORE Ee ee PRG 902 Deck Lid Release 000 99 Distribution Center Fuses 472 475 Ne INDEX 533 Door Look ss REDES SR OE eas 29 MIGE Geces seep ay ue eho eee DAE Gee 94 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 247 c naka het 4tal ees DR ees Gea aoe os 153 DIGEHIIP 25 654 eux ELS EER deo ages aoa 348 349 SUNIOOL 2444 i eeee been eee OR 239 243 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 185 WIDOWS 4 64 as oon hoe ee Gee ose Dae 36 Power Seer mp Pid eressero siero aces 489 Pregnant Women and
148. Reading Lights 031433151 Front Map Reading Light Switches 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ambient Light Interior Lights The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch ay 4 L Te i E EN 033333449 Ambient Light Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel Dimmer Switches With the parking lights or headlights on rotate the left dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument panel lights and cupholder rings if equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Ambient Light Control Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle lights and ambient light located in the overhead console Dimmer Switches 180 UNDERSTAN
149. Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect Touch To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and rele
150. Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats J 022636831 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side 022636832 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Label Location NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e Being too close to the side air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require ai
151. T If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to prog
152. TANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the EVR button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the vR button and say Send 3 7 4 6 ff Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry with First and or Last Name as Voicemail Password then if you press the EvR button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignor
153. Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if os equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a a n pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the 2 TPM Telltale Light to illumina
154. XAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 374 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always d
155. a accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec 40 km h tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pres
156. a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer
157. ages Using Voice Commands GE FM917 10 10 NW 54 ou e Press the amp button Auch Cua ut ined ae ee CB e After the Listening prompt and the following beep TE say Send message to John Smith mobile vr EER 3 Call me e After the system prompts you for what message you 4 Need directions want to send say the message you wish to send or say List There are 18 preset messages 5 I ll be there in XX minutes While the list of defined messages are being read you can interrupt the system by pressing the VR button and saying the message you want to send List of P tM After the system confirms that you want to send your Mdb d message to John Smith your message will be sent 1 Yes 2 No 3 Okay 4 I can t talk right now 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Call me TH call you later Thanks 5 6 7 l m on my way 8 9 TIl be late 10 I will be number minutes late 11 See you in number minutes 12 Stuck in traffic 13 Start without me 14 Where are you 15 Are you there yet 16 I need directions 17 I m lost 18 See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to ei
158. ain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine NS TA TING AND OPERATING 353 OFF the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating Anti Lock Brake System The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The electronic brake force distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a sli
159. als the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 373 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Ibs Occupant 3 160 Ibs ts E 100 Ibs E
160. ams phone cll entrar steering wheel alier pushing the Uncenert vos command bu DEVR Garmin Guided Dialog Ter iting restaurante tral are near to you current location Garmin prompt wil he Where Am Garmin will choose played asking if sareei will 6n Altamata route Init does not include uieplayed hoe rend Lum Imre Gurrerit aviation Rome Navination Route will not be i canceled will tra canceled 030563042 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 NOTE 2 You can say Find Nearest then Restaurant Fuel 1 You can also say Find City Find Favorite Find Transit Lodging Shopping Bank Entertain Play by Category Find Play by Name Find Recently ment Recreation Attractions Community Found Where to or Go Home Auto Services Hospitals Parking Airport Po lice Stations Fire Stations or Auto Dealers 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Hands Free Calling Universal amp Connect Commands The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button te on he steering wheel Cancels listening t your voice Settings screen Bluetooth paired will be shown audio devices will Connection be shawn process will be completed with touch screen tommand Bluetooth Phone List of connected List of paired phones will be sho
161. an 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed i 055007576 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 Worn Tire to help you in determining when your tires should be 2 New Tire replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced NS TA TING AND OPERATING 379 Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size qualit
162. an Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety 4 Maximum Load Standards Code TIN ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure T Met df 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and e lemporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo Temperature Grades rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure 366 STARTING AND OPERATING ee compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded ample T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent
163. an present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE See Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine ai
164. and arrows on the filter will indicate this 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind
165. anding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights or parking lights on or place the ignition in ACC or RUN the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE e The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature e The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE e SmartBeam can be turned on or off using the Uconnect Touch Syst
166. anol TL 392 Mini Dons Computer us otek tater ee SEN 288 in c 92 Automate DIMIN 3 353 EE SR VOE d 92 Electric Powered 0 000 ss se 94 Electric Remote 5g ES ERR EG EE ERAS 94 Exterior FOldme acus medo HAMER oe Sos 93 Heated sib OR DERE eee ek 96 eco ev 92 uA rrr 96 Mode Fuel Saver 222 xGnag bm ee ORE EER ERK 286 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 2 4 gars mado cms 383 Mopar atts PE IE 442 514 MIDE EIBE 3 e e 9494 994292599 Hi ie 392 Multi Function Control Lever 175 Navigation System Uconnect gps 226 New Vehicle Break In Period 80 Occupant Restraints 4426545456025 41 60 65 Occupant Restraints Sedan 58 60 64 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 391 488 Odometer 22225232 59 ew bee dee RR ASTE 267 Oil Change Indicator 2 nodum qe ped woes 268 285 532 INDEX NEE Id Oil Change Indicator Reset ss 44 9 4 44644 ER 268 285 OU Filter 10088 ens ROKER DAE PRE gas d 446 Oil Filter Selection lt lt 04 Es PEER REDE 446 OIL Eie ie acsi PR RATE BREDIE oS 444 488 els aa 44 304 us Sas A ach S bots awe 487 Chance iterval iss ia sas eem te we 285 444 Sun AP 444 DIDEHEK serseri ee ee hkr REE 444 Di od ee eee e s es 445 Piller Cr 446 488 oi SAD ee ao scoop S EE OE 8 eee 445 Materials Added to 0 0 445 Recommendation 00 4 444 487 idee ties e
167. ant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of m
168. ars Boe Co ns 356 Brake Control System Electronic sis iss ed me 355 brake WHC 222 guage use AE OE DEE SEE 489 Brake BIEN sretan mari a eer e DR one 352 462 Anti Lock ABS suce tus wa Chee one E RN 999 Flaid heck aeree iex ERE IS 462 489 Master Cynder sess 2 dae unm d Ha pos Re 462 Lars cat eG 84 VA PANEM MARE Ad 350 Wore LOS E 6242 04 55 44 qn DRR i gas 273 352 Broke Parkie 224442444545 A39 63 VER a d 350 Brake Transmission Interlock 335 ee ee EO ee EE TED Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 522 INDEX M Brightness Interior Lights se Ee HEDE EE si 179 Bulb Keplacement 5423 40044 sansa a ems 480 481 DHIBS Licht s os SERE SAG REDS LESER 84 480 Camera Rear ns soe quies doe ey hee eee eae es 226 Capacities Fluid 42 7464 e s seno tebe a EERS 487 Caps Filler CHLTEBSHI 6h4tat te nes burs mese RR ee 445 omie DIPCHOS souse sae slee EE dr eas 349 Radiator Coolant Pressure 459 a Ro or Gees on 6 TP CT ead oa Ce eee 467 Carbon Monoxide Warning 81 395 Cargo Vehicle Loading a xn we ws oa ep ona 399 Celule PRODE serere Ge SUE Em 313 Certification Label 2 uius kac dh aciem a ea 999 Chains Wine 2 22 be Be REX OES RS ES eee es 381 Chaneues A Flat Tie ois sob a DOER OE REOR 417 GELE Tie OWS amp eee d ET SOR WU eee TREES 366 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 270 440 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 81 Checks c s carta RE
169. as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power until the ignition key is re moved or the ignition switch is changed to OFF using the Keyless Go Start Stop button e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritatio
170. ase When the Panic Alarm is on the N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key
171. assenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with belt alert seat belt remains unfastened 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNINCG Using a seat belt extender when not needed can in crease the risk of injury in an accident Only use when Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
172. ations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 518 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
173. ature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Operating e Electronic Speed Control ON This telltale will illuminate when the electronic O speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Electronic Speed Control SET This telltale will illuminate when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is R ON For further information refer to Adap tive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This telltale will illuminate when the ACC is Fens SET For further information refer to Adap tive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 EVIC Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW This telltale informs the driver that the For ward Collision Warning feature is Off The OFF telltale is On when the front radar sensor is blocked and requires cleaning the ACC FCW sensors require service or the ACC FCW system is unavailable because of a system
174. ay In Cluster The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 e Time Format When in this display
175. ayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M feature as the driver changes feature status or follow ing conditions change If ACC is active and a warning or other feature is in the EVIC main display the ACC status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line e For vehicles with Cruise one of several messages will be displayed giving a dynamic update of the status of the feature as the driver changes feature status or conditions change If Cruise is active and a warning or other feature is in the EVIC main display the Cruise status will be displayed in place of the EVIC odometer line Press and release the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed is highlighted in the EVIC Press the SELECT button to view a digital display of the current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h Press the BACK button to return to the main menu NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT button to display the following three trip fea tures in the next screen e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
176. back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyl
177. be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Push Button NOTE The outboard head restraints are not adjustable Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for tether routing 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Folding Rear Seat After releasing the seatback it can be folded forward The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on the loops located on the upper seatback NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in use Folded Rear Seatback When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 030936862 Rear Seatback Loop NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injuty The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle
178. by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the 390 STARTING AND OPERATING ee EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM
179. c vehicle or being thrown out tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size WARNING e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Continued 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat l 022636828 Pulling Out The Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click d 022636829 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING WARNING Continued e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle
180. call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 80
181. cation of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNINCG Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instrume
182. cause a fire e Electric Power Steering Malfunction This telltale is on when the Electric Power e9 Steering is not operating and needs service NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime has sounded at the start of each ignition that an oil change is due The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Fuel Economy Press and release the UP
183. ce ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACG FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56789 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while
184. ced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam High Beam Bi Halogen Headlamp Low Beam High Beam Bi Xenon Headlamp D3S Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Turn Signal Lamp PSY24WSV Front Park Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Daytime Running Lamp nn LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Fog Lamp If Equipped H11 Front Sidemarker Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Tail Stop Tura Lamp 222mm hm LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Sidemarker Lamp a ie neces BR ace HAD LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer BackUp Lap sauces e erar ste Res Red CRUS Rp W21W Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer License W5W BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Inner Park Lamp and Outer Park Lamp High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails
185. cident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone Button is used to wi recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will get into the phone mode and make calls show hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command Sve Button t VR is only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The VR button is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect
186. cle always remove the key An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or SENTRY KEY others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor dren should be warned not to touch the parking ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The brake brake pedal or the shift lever system does not need to be armed or activated Operation Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or or unlocked ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie CAUTION Th
187. cluded if equipped 033333450 Overhead Console 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Map Reading Lights To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is the console These buttons are backlit for night time pressed ery Sunglass Bin Door At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights 033333448 Sunglass Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink chan nels HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your
188. compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems CHRYS LEI a o E y SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 12C 482 126 AB 2nd Edition Printed in U S A
189. ct Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV 105 sicui M C v 108 O Phone Call Features 119 O Uconnect Phone Features 124 O Advanced Phone Connectivity 128 O Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect M PRONG e 9399 tone 4h woes oa ot 129 O General Information ll 138 B Voice Command sss 139 D Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV 139 O Uconnect Voice Commands 141 O Voice Tree M RARR ER REED OD m 142 M OH ee ee DE HOE DER RE se 153 Boer Sedis a ovs 9 3 ate P ow ee nee ae ON 153 A Power LumDaf lt e suce sos er x kaa ER hens es 156 Pleated el P CE es 156 O Ventilated Seats If Equipped 159 ELlead Resigns isa Re RR MR HR eed 161 G Folding Rear Seat sis cen Rn eric er RE 164 N Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 165 O Programming The Memory Feature 166 O Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory 167 O Memory Position Recall LL 167 O Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only 168 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 W To Open And Close The Hood 169 ETUR Signals 62465556645 ERROR EER ees 176 NS RES sca P2 9Q ae EE sep ees 171 O Lane Change Assist sess 176 HiHeadheht Switch Sassa oreet 171 o High Low Beam Switch ss esce ep Retos 176 o Automatic Headlights If Equipped 171 HE ie lo dies aie RE ren EG
190. d Inside the center console armrest there is a removable underneath the center console armrest upper storage tray that can be slid forward rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area This tray has an integrated coin holder along with additional area for small items like an ipod or phone Below the upper tray the lower storage compartment is made for larger items like CDs and tissue boxes In addition the 12 volt power outlet USB and Aux jack are located here WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music 035335227 players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 Rear Seat Armrest Storage If Equipped For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the armrest Lift upward on the latch to open the storage compartment Door Storage The door panels contain storage areas 035235231 Front Door Trim Storage Rear Armrest Storage 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling rear seatbacks
191. d area ease up on the accelerator 2 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park ZpQg lights or headlights are turned on 3 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 4 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 5 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 6 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the
192. d deployment occurs the SABIC and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e In an accident you and your passengers can suffer WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others air bags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even could cause serious injury including death Air on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably and cause an accident that includes you This can happen extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or far away from home or on your own street instrument panel Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side A
193. d on the steering wheel Commands only available Commanas available in Commands only available in AM FM mode AMIFMISatellite mode In Satellite mode ETT Audio will a will Audio wil Audio will Audio will change to 950 p e kd Rg change to the change to change to AM next Satellite salellite station Salellite ie ie Rock Station BO s on 8 Channel B Channel stored in preset 5 030803043 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 NOTE 4 You can replace rock with any of the satellite music 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM types frequency such as 98 7 FM 5 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face 2 You can replace 80 s on 8 with any other satellite and shaded grey station name received by the radio BT 3 You can replace 8 with any other satellite station named received by the radio 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These Commands Gan LE spoken when playing mesit from your 3b cand USB dewre Gb or iPod after pushing the Uconnect voice command button qe VR on the steering wheel Radio will play the Audio Book Dr Raia wit play Radio will play the album Ragtime Favorites Radio will play thia Podcast Weekly uta Padoast Radio will play Radio will play thre ihe Artisl Scott Song Maple Leaf Anplin Rag Radia will play the Playli
194. d to the trunk latching mechanism e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and 2 all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupant Trunk Emergency Release 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years o
195. de and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioner The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensio
196. ding The Features Of Your Vehicle 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status touch and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual a
197. dos EDE RO N AE 992 Pogine Fails to SIE va venatio a9 gs 332 REMORD C HR ER ER AAR RE De 25 Starting and Operating uus add EE cer RP ed ages 329 Dtaripes IOOSOUMS 443 4444 PARA rhe PR dn 929 Steering COMM OMGEE 4 oie ee RE ee AG N gi de 175 Colum oek sy dee BERE decode DOR die 184 Peel 24442 44 4 EGRE EEEE beh EEU bi 348 349 Tilt Column eere 184 185 Wheel Heated 2s cua Ed se EES EES de 186 Wheel Tilt SS SS SS 184 185 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 311 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Oyster COMMONS 42 5608 sie 655049544 RE ER 311 or C 255 480 Storage VENICE 63 rues buat eee eae ROS 322 480 Storing Your Vehicle 2454445446584 405 p94 4 480 Selle Me oi AE PERSE weed Uds pay seen ee 430 DUM ROO gos eee hk ob eae Rx ee ee ewes x N 239 243 DUR Asses IOLA cata ala agg P ores a ae aa 230 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 54 Vaher ENGINE Cul soas d Rus Pari seus ta oA 445 oyst m Remole Garne 244454444 ae ERR RE 25 TSCDOHID senpre twee dn tyes Sides BE OOR EE 267 Telescoping Steering Column 184 185 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 320 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 275 406 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 73 There Alarm Security Alarm 5x42 RR m Res 17 Theft System Security Alarm 17 TE Steerme Comi sses ea edes HERDERS 184 185 Jume Delay leaden ues care PesterERTS PES 172 Tire and Loading Information Placard
198. driving in curves ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station ary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of steep hills This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and mance may be limited it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stati
199. e and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the amp button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call Emergency or Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the touch screen e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 f
200. e next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 68 qf t FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out We 72 Phonebook gt Fa Er ELGIN TE a Ej Voicemail Edit Number Reset to Default Wi Pepe Roni a Budd y s Pizza e The Options pop up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Name Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Favorite Phonebook e Mobile Phonebook e Recent Call Log e SMS Message Viewer 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE All of the above operations except Redial canbe Call Controls done with 1 call or less active The touch screen allows you to control the following call Dial By Saying A Number features e Press the Se button to begin e Answer e End e After the Listening prompt and the
201. e If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing zits the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is mea
202. e exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position 358 STARTING AND OPERATING ie WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing ESC also cannot prevent accidents resultin
203. e Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air Selecting Air Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this position y for air pump operation only Use the Black Air J Pump Hose 7 when selecting this mode pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409 TIREFIT Usage Precautions Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the sys tem Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use After each use always replace these components immediately at an authorized dealer When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded e For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
204. e Precautions O Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT 405 405 406 407 407 409 411 Bl Jacking And Tire Changing 417 H Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 417 O Preparations For Jacking mes uk dx een es O Jacking And Changing A Tire O Road Tire Installation B Jump Starting Procedures 426 O Preparations For Jump Start 427 OJump Starting Procedure 428 404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ee Mi Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 0 430 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 433 W Shift Lever Override 5 Speed O Without The Ignition Key Fob 435 IOSD SON s 223 3 EE eee tha eee E Y S dr 431 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position
205. e Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat After cycling the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided w
206. e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using Park View to be able to must continue to pay attention while backing up stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio 1 Turn the Radio on Press the More soft key Press the Settings soft key Press the check box soft key next to Parkview 2 3 4 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 5 Backup Camera to enable disable OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink and power sunroof switches may also be in
207. e Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door Door Lock Knob trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the Tf the door lock knob is down when you shut the door inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel not inside the vehicle before closing the door upward NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Power Door Locks EEN A power door lock switch is on each front door trim For personal security and safety in the event of an panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors accident lock the
208. e default condition is disabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch z Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system 021835329 To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System Child Protection Door Lock Function 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the em
209. e hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot TIREFIT KIT Small punctures up to 1 4 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 88 km hr WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407 TIREFIT Storage TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk Q 9 DO o 060410595 6 1 Sealant Bottle TIREFIT Location 2 Deflation Button 3 Pressure Gauge 4 Power Button 408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5 Mode Select Knob Selecting Sealant Mode Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this Pe Ene od position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant 7 Air Pump Hose Black why and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant 8 Power Plug AA Hose clear hose 6 when selecting this mode Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to turn On the TIREFIT kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Using The Deflation Button y Press th
210. e recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn off the TIREFIT kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instrument panel 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Vehicle CAUTION e The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma nent damage to the kit D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h N WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 415 WARNING 3 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the stem tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using 4 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure TIREFIT Do not exce
211. e road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Always check the depth of the standing water e Driving through standing water may cause dam before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting wate
212. ected through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of P air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets u e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may increase 13 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn
213. ed e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The amp vr button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the EVR button and say John Smith to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More soft key then touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The stat
214. ed The fluid should only be 350 STARTING AND OPERATING M If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage ES eum Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NNS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 351 NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound the parking brake Always apply the parking to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle before attempting to move the vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from
215. ed 55 mph 88 km h until the Gauge 3 tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar the tire is too to you your passengers and others around you badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT before continuing 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn on TIREFIT and 2 mum the Mode Select Koob O do She Air Mode inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and as loading information label on the driver side door open position ing NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 bar or higher 2 Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet 416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the TIREFIT Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser vice center 5 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Re
216. ed after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING Continued Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel Always make sure that floor mats are properly the air directed against the windshield See your autho attached to the floor mat fasteners rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move free
217. ed to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
218. eed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high b
219. ehicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grades refer to Mainte nance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty EE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO WARNING AREA Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or riding in these areas are more likely to be seri out of the area ously injured or killed E If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine Do not allow people to ride in any area of your running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed
220. ehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary The Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed e Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button e Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 8 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL button 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition e You switch off ESC If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last drive
221. ehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 8 Disconnect the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VE
222. em refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Adaptive Bi Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights If Equipped This system automatically swivels the headlight beam pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in the direction the vehicle is steering NOTE e Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on the headlights will initialize by performing a brief sequence of rotations e The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when the vehicle is moving forward The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights DRL The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when ever the ignition is placed in the RUN position the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving NOTE The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch
223. emain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to ac
224. ep the ParkSense system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key e When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE or DRIVE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for approximately five seconds in REVERSE or for 5 seconds when the vehicle is in DRIVE Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST message to be displayed in the EVIC N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even CAUTION e
225. er usce Rd RU RISE ES 267 Instrument Panel and Controls 265 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 471 Integrated Power Module Fuses 472 Interior Appearance Cale eo Res 469 Interior TH eS 2 922443 39 9 9 9 2 Kutse hia 472 Inter LIENS so ERROR ener ss OR BERE 178 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 181 IntrOGQUCcHOB isi ERA RES 24404645484 Red Sa 05 4 Jack Location sears sok eet Goan PRE KAREE 417 Jack Operation amp ie sess oe P N ed inea DE OE 420 Jacking Instructions use VLOER eas an PAR 420 WOM State ste da ALT EE oe eee oH 426 Key liede ide ons PR RE HR DR oop ag are 14 kes EO SOGE us EER Oa ER KERR ER Es 17 key REPACEMENT ok Er tiis eee DTI e 16 Key Sentry immobilizer 24534 ve eoe eds an d 15 Keyless Enter N Go 2e sb emat Fes 32 330 Ne INDEX 529 Keyless Loty oy stent ia qox REDE X OE ERES 20 KReviess GO TIT 12 CVG rUC rrem 12 Kicker Sound System ua x erecti e ops d secar 310 Kiiee Del et aaneen REA iba Pure S hU ayes 54 Lane Change and Turn Signals 176 Lane Change Assist ax cx qox ke A de tere ees 176 Lap Sho lder Dolls 1 3 Vx eens d vp eos 45 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 73 74 LoDE see betes ghee bea EE SA 46 Ig ROETE SE hans oe HE EE EIE N 84 Lead Free Gasoline steer RR RR EE ie eds 391 Leaks Fluid eee 84 Mite Oldies as nu EERDER KAS bonds eet ahs oo 379 Lent DUDS 244542402 fons eo oe es EE EG 84
226. er in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION e nspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake Failure to perform the required maintenance items master cylinder and power steering add as needed may result in damage to the vehicle e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Required Maintenance Intervals operation Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If you are using your vehicle in du
227. er such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Cool
228. er sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the swi
229. ergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EEE NOTE WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door ha
230. ering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using EM 91 7 we the Uconnect Touch System EE se Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated amd SENSE Steering Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering Seat Sew MU wheel Press the Heated Steering Wheel soft key a se f vere second time to turn the heated steering wheel off En ap 8874 10 10 NW 54 ou ay asked Mm 1 6 1130 1310 Heated Steering Wheel Soft Key NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Eguipped With Remote Start On models that are eguipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on 030939992 Controls So
231. error For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind d ag ym shield washer fluid is low e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Malfunction s This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Red Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include e Door Ajar This telltale turns on when one or more doors i are ajar The telltale will show which doors are ajar e Trunk Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk lid is ajar S e Oil Pressure Warning Telltale wi This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Telltale This telltale shows the statu
232. ess Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears
233. ether Strap Mounting child Use only the anchor positions directly behind 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor strap 022636908 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the drivetrain engine transmission clutch and rear axle in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 500 miles 800 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in However wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high quality and energy conserving Oil fluid and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which v
234. ew aei era Tre 446 O Engine Air Cleaner Fitter ws uo aces es ies 446 H Maimtenance Free Battery s cseczsziasc 447 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 449 AG Air Fillet iss ES Re EE SE BR ESOS 450 E Body Lubrication sam 13 REI ee naw S o Windshield Wiper Blades OAdding Washer Fluid 24 sz mto 453 O Exhaust Systemi xo 4 uar kar px RUP EER 454 HCoolnp System los RE ER Eu y 456 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE See E Pike EO oce dE CE ee hous te ue EE 462 E Automate Transmission ege cioe Ro sea a5 464 El Roar ede PP 466 D Appearance Care And Protection From Soi n sad HD EE EO 466 W Fuses 2 eee eee eee 472 H Integrated Power Module 472 O Rear Power Distribution Center ll Vehicle Storage ll Replacement Bulbs B Bulb Replacement 4 481 O Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Inner Park Lamp And Outer Park Lamp 481 O Rear Backup Lamp And Turn Died EQS pan Ee aces ep oe DOER Se 484 E License lamp ase ed e do REA E En eRe 486 W Fluid Capacities 0 002004 487 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 488 BEE MIE si ey od 979 0 6938 2 Gee Pa eee 488 EE IASSIS m 489 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 4L M j M 4 m L 3 a aie IN S P IE x gt r 9 9 ed 1 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Power
235. f the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Uconnect Text Messaging Reading Text Messages e comecnas car De soccer men tne teo messe mio s shoe Uconnect Text Messaging Teno emen dle nen be eor eden i rone ayy cote tien prebere He d Ls emm Dine me tamer on ME STR WHS Tome ately Uim LAS mm pes plante tela te Ve Um skerm ny mt med Enter message TOM dened kel frrivide m singing IN by system or say tor List to haar ali 18 downloaded defined nessayes town phone p Wig tha message text i Alarme massage displayess tine latinus id eral js pead aul e rxwnerzimde sert cutis ander message nimang ciiis ening me Uconmect phone are avasiable automatically WM Messe nt HG mumber i writ try Mesane trat Fnirr messur frm wil e read out dehned lst provide Dy over the system or say List t vehicle asuma hear al 18 defined system meossBsges Enter in contact r dmis saut phone tyne 030863305 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
236. fer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the au thorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement 1 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color 2 Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle 3 Press the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place 6 Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Continued WARNING e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Being
237. filter L1 Rotate tires _J Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 504 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 114 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter H Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspec
238. formation in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pre
239. from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in your fav
240. ft Key 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cush ion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat ADJUSTABLE PEDALS The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield 032036861 Adjustable Pedals Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 e The pedals cannot
241. g from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capa bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has three available operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 359 WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited wheel slip feature described in The ESC Off switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESC ON again mo mentarily p
242. g cornering acceleration and braking 15 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi eo mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 16 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped a This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con e trol ESC is off OFF N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 17 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydrau
243. ges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However
244. ght clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued e The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisti The Anti Lock Brake system ABS canner prevent cated electronic equipment that may be suscep the natural laws of physics from acung Un the tible to interference caused by improperly in vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering stalled or high output radio transmitting efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition equipment This interference can cause possible of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including tho
245. gine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow ing conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator AUTOSTICK Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or Console Mounted Shifter AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking and improve overall vehicle perfor mance 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ie This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available
246. gs in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts
247. gure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NOTE e Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWKRs e Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground or using a tow dolly is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle behind an other vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers Mi If Your Engine Overheats B TIREFIT Kit O TIREFIT Storage O TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation O TIREFIT Usag
248. h 48 km h max speed Flat Tow Wheel Lift PON e 15 mi 24 km max distance Rar OK Flatbed BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN equipment designed for the purpose following equip position not the ACC position 6 ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Manual Park Release or Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing 434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Flatbed towing is recommended If the transmission is operable vehicles this vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia will occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to the front or rear suspension compo The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL nents Damage to your vehicle may result from The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h imprope
249. h downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING Continued Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release shoulder belt is no longer resting against your the switch when you have reached the desired position chest In a collision you could slide under the seat WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious belt which could result in serious injury or death 3 CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt the seat controls
250. h the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a physician immediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil dren If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT A Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding 3 Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn Off the ignition 4 Set the parking brake 412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M B Setting Up To Use TIREFIT 1 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Sealant Mode position 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from
251. haracteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode refer to AutoStick in this section to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will con tinue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK NNS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 341 3 Turn the engine OFF 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the en
252. have them checked with a torgue wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Road Tire Installation 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts 426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft Ibs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to e
253. he distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Two latches must be released to open the hood Keyless Enter N Go the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy E
254. he tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and adjustable headrest with the headrest in the full down position then attach the hook to the tether anchor located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window 022637851 Adjustable Headrest Downward Position Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 WARNING restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle NOTE e Ensure that the tether
255. hen not using Uconnect if equipped 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect Touch system display When the Uconnect Touch system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and pas senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display 045635318 General Overview Si Hard Keys The hard keys are located below the Uconnect Touch screen in the center of the instrument panel Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen 044435866 Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Soft keys Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Performing this function will cause the automatic opera tion to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
256. hen the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 CAUTION 9 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 10 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is lt Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the flashing severe catalytic converter damage and uy vehicle power loss will soon occur Immediate service is eaae 11 Fuel Gauge 4 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced 12 Air Bag Warning Light above can reach higher temperatures than in normal This light will turn on for four to eight seconds Operating conditions This can cause a fire if you 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first drive slowly or park over flammable substances such turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on
257. hildren alone in a vehicle or with before shifting into any driving gear access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Continued Continued 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Continued e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote EE Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in k the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system ta
258. ht If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 022636830 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt allow the belt to retract fully away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it WARNING up or down to the position that fits you best A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 022636838 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average
259. id level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating If you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunction have conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe CAUTION damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu fluid level accurately facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper other than that recommended by the manufacturer maintenance intervals will require more frequent fluid and filter If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu fluid and filter should be changed ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Continued 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Axle For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion
260. ies of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never b
261. ignition switch is on You can be injured by WARNINC moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK plosion 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429 CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the v
262. ile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets 3 Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display which memory posi tion has been set NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 e The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release button 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 wi
263. inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equ
264. ing any of the following methods e Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter e Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will r
265. ing the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflat
266. int system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars V located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are located just below the button with the anchorage symbol on the rear seat but are not visible You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces x n addition there are tether strap anchorages sy behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach t
267. ion and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 10 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 11 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 12 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode gt Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is dir
268. ion pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck 378 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster th
269. ir Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Continued in your vehicle are buckled up properly Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING Continued of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted atal times e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during body and can take the forces of an accident best very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under your injuries in an accident much worse You normal conditions However in an accident the belt will might suffer internal injuries or you could even lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the slide out of part of the belt Follow these instru
270. ired in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E 85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E 85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline M
271. irement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte t nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I
272. itch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the vehicle The following table shows the approximate center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to distances for each zone a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 1 ft 30 cm Yellow 0 1ft 3ft80cm 1 m 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
273. ith a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch and Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visib
274. kes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Enter N Go feature operates similar to an ignition s
275. ks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 514 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California
276. l free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for www HomeLink com for information or assistance safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device 034134074 Power Sunroof Switch e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the pow
277. larm Theft Alarm 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 457 488 Selection OF Oil iua soe Ree HR EUR eg 444 pentty Key Immobilizer awe yucet d were 15 Sentry Key Programming 5244644594459 eee n 17 sentry Key Replacement aou deno ii sietada 16 Service Assistance nonan aaaea 511 Del Vice ORBE ees wana se tu pee Y eee S 519 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator lesen 270 Service Manuals ausa done pde d RERO Es 515 Denia Tho lOS ss bES o HA HORE HERE eE 309 Shift Lever Override 2 000000 G 431 DMN lle ues eee ae eee ee eee aay 334 Automatic Transmission 334 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 49 Shoulder DE sae TER KAT RO ooo QURE SEEN nee 45 Bide AOA MD CET 63 Side View Mirror Adjustment 92 ea LE ii AA EE EA EE TEER GE 84 176 267 Slippery Surtaces Driving OU iss esre sessa 345 vincit curar MM 173 Snow Chains Tire Chains 381 Sound System Sie ARIE EE EE OE EN 310 OPE TE bg au oes ees bee KERR DAE PA AG A17 Pare Wes io ee Sane LEER EERS REOR S 488 Specifications Fuel Gasoline ize ex RE 9544 488 s EER EED OGRE ERA ese Aha eo Di 488 Speed Control Cruise Control 190 193 DOCcUOMCI AP Henne ees 271 536 INDEX NEE id OPE Mode ss HEIL ER ED RO DES ER DA bees 343 LUI 25 999 9 3 931 519 GHG ED EDE HR DE 25 329 Automatic Transmission 929 Cold Weather 2 202540
278. ld and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC or Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB an
279. ld be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity wat
280. le signals the horn will pulse the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e l ress LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid FOB available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed us
281. le to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To WARNING reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription inane He minder Oto way E J road use only and should not be done on any public SRT Performance Features roadways It is recommended that these features be To access the SRT Performance Features touch the used in a controlled environment and within the More soft key then touch the SRT soft key Press the limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as UP or DOWN soft key to cycle through the features measured by the performance pages must never be Press the feature soft key to select that feature exploited in a reck
282. lean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Backup Lamp and Turn Signal Lamps 1 Open the trunk 2 Remove the trunk trim by removing the grocery hook using a 1 20 torque driver or similar tool remove the 4 Inner Park Lamp Bulb fastener and pull back the weather strip 5 Outer Park Lamp Bulb N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 3 Pull back the trunk liner to gain access to the tail lamp wing nuts 4 Remove the three wing nuts from the back of the tail lamp assembly 5 Pull the tail lamp assembly away from the vehicle enough to access the electrical connector 6 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 7 Disconnect the electrical connector 8 Continue removing lamp from vehicle in order to access the bulb s 9 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly 10 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 11 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise 12 Reinstall the tail lamp assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk trim 13 Close the trunk 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee ea License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket
283. lert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the
284. lerts Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument alert chime after approximately 3 seconds when an Panel for further information obstacle has been detected the vehicle is stationary and brake pedal is applied Fast Continuous When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS Enabling And Disabling ParkSense TEM OFF message for approximately five seconds ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Uconnect Touch System The available choices are Off in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE or to DRIVE at or below 7 mph 11 km h and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for approximately five seconds in REVERSE or for 5 seconds when the vehicle is in DRIVE Service The ParkSense Park Assist System When the ParkSense Park Assist System is malfunction ing the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle The instrument cluster will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST message when any of the rear or front sensor s are blocked by snow mud or ice and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE or DRIVE The i
285. less or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The Performance Page include the following e Timers e Engine Values e Digital Gauge Displays NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 e 0 60 mph 0 100 km h e Braking Distance e 1 8 Mile e 1 4 Mile e Instantaneous G Force e Peak G Force e Digital Speedometer The following describes each feature and its operation Timers 0 60 mph 0 100 km h 1 8 Mile 1 4 Mile When selected this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h 1 8 mile or 1 4 mile e The feature will be ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h e Soft keys allow access to the current best and last times recorded Braking Distance When selected this screen displays the vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed e This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h e The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com plete stop G Force When selected this screen displays all four G Force values two lateral and two longitudinal as well as steering angle 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as
286. lic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when
287. lippery areas 6 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher help prevent personal injury or damage to your l hicle 3 Set the parking brake B EE EN e Always park on a firm level surface as far from 4 Place the shift lever into PARK the edge of the roadway as possible before raising 5 Turn OFF the ignition 6 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack Ing eo Hor example if changing Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic the right front tire block the left rear transmission in PARK a manual transmission in wine REVERSE 060506162 Continued N WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES 421 WARNING Continued CAUTION Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a Do not attempt to raise
288. ll display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped stop mov ing A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle T
289. ll increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed Tire Rotation Standard Tires The suggested rotation method is the side to side as shown in the following diagram STARTING AND OPERATING 383 SSS Ec gt 055703771 055705379 Tire Rotation Tire Rotation Tire Rotation All Season Tires TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the with all season tires is the forward cross as shown in driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom the following diagram mended cold placard pressure 384 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General In
290. long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022641323 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger 2 Knee Bolster Advanced Front Air Bags 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
291. lower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE e Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures
292. ly can cause loss of vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Continued Continued 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe
293. mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 8 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I v an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate w
294. may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service Fuel System Cautions assistance CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of Continued such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con eae WARNING Continued trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon m
295. mission v suse ER Ra 465 EER eq rari SUR Bord 6m nes 271 DIOE oere ranp erer EERE E SU 462 br EN OR ED EES DER T 281 Cooling Dy SION se sems E RE RAS EEE EED ER 457 Materials Added 44 44 ves oes ed RECS 394 ENCWC OW 60e4 ag tesa ue et ERNA N 444 Meel usce sx wars discs ica d eae ee eae 202 ower SISSE Gxt ae UE BEDE OR AI aid d 349 Octane Rang ssyidrrysd AE eb or 391 488 Puid Drake 246520295440 REED ee 24 489 ReguremEnis Lcd oem ee aan aang ens A eae Us 391 FIGS 4 142252 9201728 8 9 508 EE EO A 488 Paver MOE 449454 ae yt uA OE ER GAAR 286 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 488 periods sieke EER EER RR ERS GSES 488 bos LIS 63242445648 e08e eet ee ee ees 174 267 Eise oe vods abd eu ei Ee p URS Y PEDE 487 Foldiig edt DedE so cce tripe dot ERWEE Ed 164 Fuel Opumizer a acesioeectasens IP SOR Ro 286 N INDEX 527 Fuel Saver 22129 eek 65553400 RES SE fS 286 OSES 4545465 EA RT RE N FEE EE EG A72 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 231 Gasoline Puel sisie dete amar ee bee DE 991 CONS IVI PPP arene eRe ES 286 Gasoline Clean Air een 392 Gasoline Reformulated 392 Gauges Coolant Temperature si ny ederet kc goes 275 Ed AE oe we ee ee E 2 4 Speedometer serre syret SERA SEE Ree eS 271 Tachometer 0 0 0 0 0 cece ee eens 267 Gear KINDES MMC ER 336 Gear Select Lever Override 431 General Information 17 24 138 212 391 General Maintenance
296. mum of Cruise Control 20 mph 32 km h WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed 032433400 that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and Cancelled m Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button 96789 mi road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the SET but
297. n rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de Maintaining Your Air Bag System ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING WARNING e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you in another collision Have the air bags protect you Do not modify the components or seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac wiring including adding any kind of badges or tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con upper right side of the instrument panel Do not troller ORC system serviced as well modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued N THINGS T KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 W
298. n 5 mph 8 km h they will automatically unfold Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Visor To use the Slide On Rod feature of the sun visor rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 desired position To use the extender feature of the sun visor grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward 030440176 Slide On Rod Feature BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle l l l l i
299. n snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 346 STARTING AND OPERATING M 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away th
300. nal lights NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Front Map Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed The front map reading lights are mounted in the over head console 031433150 Front Map
301. nal set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience e The ACC system system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibil ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always re quired while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury Continued Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve hicles and stationary objects e g a stopped ve hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Cannot take street traffic and weather condi tions into account and may be limited upon ad verse sight distance conditions Does not predict the lane curvature or the move ment of preceding vehicles and will not compen sate for such changes Does not always fully recognize complex driv ing conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop
302. ndicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 system This noise should be considered normal andit checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are does not in any way damage the steering system apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho WARNING rized dealer Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do Power Steering Fluid Check not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined power steering fluid service interval is not requir
303. ndle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If one of the vehicle
304. ners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front p
305. nflatable Curtains SABIC e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as uu determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC objects could cause harm if the vehicle ai which may receive information from the front impact collision severe enough to cause the air bag to cancer inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an covers or attempt to open them manually You may impact that requires air bag deployment This low output damage the air bags and you could be injured is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is because the air bags may no longer be functional used for more severe collisions The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any Way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME
306. ng wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column switch is located below the multifunc tion lever on the steering column gt Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Switch 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To tilt the steering column move the switch up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the switch toward you or push the switch away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the ste
307. ngine Soon Malfunction Indicator 270 OmarDedHiS et due be ons Go SS X EX YS 173 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 272 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 268 383 Traction Control mes aor desde EO aaa ees 363 TOM ord reer gud indu de OA ARE d 84 175 176 NOMIC MIOT eee x renere er EER e dod Rer 96 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 267 Loading Vehicle sca co querida a om ded Eg 399 401 Capacities arr eo os 401 TANS oa ARE ed ee Ge es ae 370 Ee ARLENE sod HERE GO ba NITE ME 28 Auto Unlock 6 4 6 e Se bee Coho rn 30 Automatic Door iu 3a Goad OS ow E SA 30 Child Protection vorme 8 eee RR bees EN YR 31 WOOP TOER SIEL ne apa ee ee ee eee ee 28 Power Dood 45 exe Veg Eos EER SEE ge usd 29 Low Tire Pressure System ii san SR RS eem oes 383 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 2420 enki e ER oe ee 73 74 LubucdHOD Dody grossesses ER RE AD RR 452 N INDEX 531 Maintenance bree Daley iod jore REDE LR Ds 447 Maintenance Procedures lesus 443 Maintenance Schedule 492 Maintenance General eee 443 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 270441 Manual Transmission 00008 466 Fluid Level Check 466 Manual Service 0 0 ee ee en 515 Master Gy lider Drakes usos OE 9 d wars 462 Memory Feature Memory Seat 165 hun doc EPIIT 165 Memory Seats and Radio 165 Meth
308. nition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 20 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 260 pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the 260 and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want
309. nits When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Fuel Saver Displ
310. nstrument cluster will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST message when any of the rear or front sensors are damaged and require service When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE or DRIVE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SERVICE PARK ASSIST or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE or DRIVE at speeds less than 7 mph 11 km h Under this condition Park Sense will not operate Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If CLEAN PARK ASSIST appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST or SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see an authorized dealer 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to ke
311. nsure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427 CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury am gt Preparations For Jump Start 1 Remote Positive Post The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk _2 Remote Negative Post Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the Remote Battery Posts engine compartment for jump starting 428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING its 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park SN HUNG the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the
312. nt to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the SX button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the or EVR buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the Xe or EVR buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the 3 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search system a pop up will appear for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile
313. ntry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be en abled or disabled using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 031336873 Hood Release Lever 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left The safety catch is located under the a center front edge of the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031339994 Hood Safety Latch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position LIGHTS Headlight Switch Cy The headlight switch is located on the left side of ws the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte rior lights and fog lights
314. nts in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES CAUTION Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays e When installing the integrated power module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to u
315. o sub menus SELECT Button E Press and release the SELECT button to access 040909599 the information screens or sub menu screens of a main menu item Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset displayed selected features that can be reset EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 BACK Button Press the BACK button to return to the main BACK menu from an info screen or sub menu item Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of three sections 1 The top line where compass direction odometer line and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed 3 The reconfigurable telltales section The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an
316. o the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance
317. of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC ACC SET or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status ofthe ACC When ACC is set the set speed will display or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information Adaptive Cruise Control Off NE 83 F When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready WMUZ The Light When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting The Atters has not been selected the display will read Adaptive He Lives Cruise Control Ready ACC 55 nph li E 032433431 Example Only N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC Display Warnings And Maintenance activity occurs which may include any of the following Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning e Set Speed Change The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of e System Cancel poor visibility such as in snow or heav
318. oisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery fy bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
319. ol ESC 357 B Hill Start Assist HSA 361 E Ready Alert Braking 444 3 REPRE ERR 363 El Rain brake Support a ei ed eme d OR HOK Rd 363 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light 43 9 35 65x 363 O Synchronizing ESC aus oss odo ie riede pi 364 W Tire Safety Information 365 E Dre iATKOS s cog dre Suena que Sep eee e 365 O Tire Identification Number TIN 368 H Tire Terminology And Definitions 369 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 370 B Tire Rotation All Season Tires 383 Mi Tires General Information 374 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 383 Tite Presse os eh HAAR eee ees o deas 374 O Premium System sesse oe ER end snd 386 oO Tire Inflation Pressures 4 exea VER so sc es 075 O General Information 391 O Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 377 W Fuel Requirements 291 E Radial Fly Ties dass 2444644443053 DERE 377 Ei64l BESTE 2 22 54 SEER ERG HR ba een os E Tite SONI ss aces dre dur de que RR RR 977 O Reformulated Gasoline H Inead Wear Indicators 42e ER teed ees 378 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 392 ELO OE TIE ss vaeeteaees e a aoa EUR a 379 H E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 999 A Replacement T1068 2 voa muere 9 e BR 379 OMMI In Gasolie esere nee ag oe gue or ee dh 999 W Tire Chains sax d
320. on Rain Sensing Wipers This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity The rain sense wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe slow wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of moisture that is sensed on the windshield Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance
321. on Center tridge Fuse There is also a power distribution center located in the Fuse trunk under the spare tire access panel This center 38 EA Airbag Module contains fuses and relays Red 39 EE Power Steering Red Module AC Clutch Re la dd I Red Axle Disconnect Fuse Spae Fuse Spare 51 20 Amp Vacuum Pump Yellow Fuse Spare Fuse Spare _ Rear Power Distribution Center 072741464 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE i Description Fuse Front PDC Feed 1 Front PDC Feed 2 CAUTION e When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Exterior Lighting 1 Exterior Lighting 2 Interior Lighting Washer Pump When replacing a blown fuse it is important to er use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating 12 0 1 8 Car tridge Fuse 20 Amp Cigar Lighters Instru Yellow ment Panel amp Power Outlet Console Rear MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 Mini Description Cavi
322. on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the
323. on number VIN is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart ment INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING ues Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Word About Your Keys 12 O Keyless Ignition Node KIN 12 od de 2 24 dg ayes au ER EE EE a 13 O Ignition Or Accessory On Message 14 NM Sentry Key EE EE OR N 15 E Replacement Keys 2 2 2644 RS RTT ES 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information 222 c9 be rege 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped O Rearming Of The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System ue doe scr ee RE Bi illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE D To Unlock The Doors o To Lock The Doors O To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee E Using The Panic Alari sie esr etae es 22 O Programming Additional Transmitters 29 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 23 O General Information 24 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 O How io Use Remote Start iii ec seas 25 lg Door Locks ES eese 28 B Manual Door LOCKS 222 9 R
324. on of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the trunk 2 Remove the access cover located on the left side inner trim panel Access Cover ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 3 Pull the release cable Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture 5 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear Release Cable VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on Vehicle Identification Number VIN the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH e Type of Vehicle 400 STARTING AND OPERATING M The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight
325. on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will n
326. onary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary General Information FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C ER Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET position Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the v
327. only available when the vehicle is not in moving N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 68 4 FM 981 7 4 aul 68 47 FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou Messaging Int ww EA 14 James Butler Listen James Butler 9 39 am 12 08 08 Hey Bill 1 am on my way to work Let me know if you have News bd 13 248 576 5459 Listen Message P d 12 Beatrice Adams Listen ES 11 Sanjiv Prabaker Listen omy 10 Lin Ford Listen b 9 Jay Kay Listen Read Messages Once a message is received and viewed or listened to If you receive a new text message while your phone is YOY wilh Mays OE HE connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will e Send a Reply be made to notify you that you have a new text message e Forward e Call 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Send Messages Using Soft Keys 68 FM917 10 10 NW 54 ou You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send Messaging a new message DETE 1 Yes e Touch the Phone soft key New _2 Ne 3 Call me e Touch the messaging soft key then New Message 4 Need directions e Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person 5 I ll be there in lt XX gt minutes you wish to send the message to 6 Okay e f multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message sent e Press Send or Cancel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Send Mess
328. onoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Continued 396 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located in the driver s door map pocket 056810781 Fuel Filler Door 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the 2 Open the fuel filler door nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling NS 1A TING AND OPERATING 397 NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door NOTE A funnel is provided located in the trunk in the spare tire area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can Fuel Funnel CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling 398 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violati
329. op the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE e f the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors and the rear sunsc
330. options 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel or Help These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command EVR button and say Help You will hear available commands for the screen displayed Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the
331. or DOWN button until Fuel Economy is highlighted Press the SELECT button and the next screen will display the following e Average Fuel Economy Miles Per Gallon MPG Bar graph e Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press the SELECT button to reset the Average Fuel Economy Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Average Fuel Economy ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When Average Fuel Economy is selected The word RESET gt with right arrow appears next to it Pressing the right arrow button will reset Average Fuel Economy which displays 0 immediately after reset Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset NW Dark 120mi 68 AVG 9 3 gt Reset DTE 233mi MPG 20 40 041041516 Average Fuel Economy There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display This icon will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Press the BACK
332. or Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your NOTE chances of successfully making a phone call as to that e The towing assistance call may also be initiated by for the mobile phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone touch The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the amp button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep Working With Automated Systems say Iowing Assistance This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system 126 UNDERS
333. or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passenger CRSLock CRS Lock CRS Lock ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the T
334. order to spray the windshield with washer fluid Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further informati
335. orites phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended Phonebook Mobile and Favorites name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth in order to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Messaging button will be greyed out and the feature will not be available for use NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is
336. ors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles up to approximately 79 in 200 cm from the 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depend ing on the location type and orientation of the obstacle The six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia bumper monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles up to approximately 47 in 120 cm from the front fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depend ing on the location type and orientation of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper and the de tected obstacle Park Assist 032741298 Park Assist Display UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 ParkSense Display The warning display will turn ON indicating the system omi 9r status when the vehicle
337. ot activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMI
338. ot illuminate Rear Monitoring 030405537 Overtaking Approaching UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Overtaking Passing Stationary Objects The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed Opposing Traffic slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RC
339. ou believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 516 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and
340. p Paint or equivalent on and open scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch int to match the color of hide e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint AS OUE UP pati OE EL COLE O YOUN VENCE touch them up immediately The cost of such repairsis Wheel And Wheel Trim Care considered the responsibility of the owner e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly cause that destroys the paint and protective coating with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 CAUTION e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Avoid automatic car washes
341. pening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Opening Power Shade Express Press the shade switch rearward and release it within one half second and the shade will open automatically from any position The shade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade Opening Power Shade Manual Mode To open the shade press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is p
342. plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage Continued 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console 035135226 Front Cupholders Heated and Cooled Cupholders If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled cupholders The cupholders are designed to help keep warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool Retractable Cover UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 WARNING When using the cupholder in the Heat position avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injuries medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise par ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injuty Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches Press the Cold symbol once to turn on the cupholder press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off Press the
343. ppears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver HeatedlVentilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return t
344. r Instrument Panel for further information Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030434975 Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right to select button the mirror that you want to adjust UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 NOTE A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Pressing the power folding mirror switch for more than four seconds or if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h will disable the folding feature If the mirrors are in the folded position and vehicle speed is equal or greater tha
345. r cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required nana ura ea NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery Location 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented battery that the positive cable is attach
346. r Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire 424 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION da CAUTION e For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the cae e Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use spare tire is mounted incorrectly Spare under Tires General Information in Start ing and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may 060633619 result in personal injury S Mounting Spare Tire N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft lb 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness
347. r bag occupant protection WARNING e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact Knee Impact Bolster The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the front passenger and position the front occupant for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air ba
348. r inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 348 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not i
349. r setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Forward Collision Warning FCW warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own The driver has the NW Ba F BRAKE responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument FCW Message Panel for further information The FCW Status Off Near NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is or Far will be displayed in the Uconnect Touch display 10 mph 16 km h
350. r towing Do not push or tow this vehicle with another The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435 If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km for tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Without The Ignition Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key fob is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 6 4L 439 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 440 N Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ein HARE DE wees ena beri op EET EF 440 B Replacement Parts llle 442 W Dealer Service oe des duis p e op RP ITE d 442 Bl Maintenance Procedures 443 Bid iii 6 S uas ddr ELA PA wae oa E ond 444 ARo Me OEO sog 2 ae
351. ra PRO eq ees 381 O Materials Added To Fuel 394 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 382 A PFuel System Cautions Gece twee ake resi 394 B Tire Rotation Standard Tires 382 O Carbon Monoxide Warnings 395 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ee W Adding Fuel uso iR RRRRERS RT ERES 396 Overloading 444 255 25 45n542suueuess 400 O Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 398 LOU 2e aya 4 bee eae RUR qe SPACE S 401 W Vehicle Loading 399 W Trailer Towing 401 oO Vehicle Certification Label 399 W Recreational Towing 4 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 400 Behind Motorhome Etc 4 401 o Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 400 NS TA TING AND OPERATING 329 WARNING Continued e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or belts ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle WARNING Automatic Transmission e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes 5 e Never leave c
352. ram 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Security To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn follow these steps in your vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display 3 CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian
353. reen if equipped To disable the window controls and the rear sunscreen press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 controls and the rear sunscreen press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position 021935321 Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the under
354. reen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take pre cedence over other paired phones within range NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 j2tooth Bluetooth pairing successful Droid Incredible Make this phone the favorite 030536950 NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device 3 e Touch the Player soft key to begin e Change the Source to Bluetooth e Touch the Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key NOTE Ifthere is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system
355. res rise and the gauge ap proaches H this telltale will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If the telltale turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale This telltale indicates that the transmission F fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this telltale turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEU TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
356. ress the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESC ON again by momen tarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion the TCS section has been disabled All other stabil ity features of ESC function normally When in Partial Off mode the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Full Off This mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways In this mode all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF To enter the Full Off mode press and hold the ESC Off switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds a chime will sound the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light will illuminate and the ESC OFF mes sage will display in the vehicle odometer Press and 360 STARTING AND OPERATING M release the TRIP ODOMETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message The ESC OFF message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer to Elect
357. result in a collision Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 Fluid Level Check CAUTION Continued Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted e The flu
358. rive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 376 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from enter
359. ronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To turn ESC ON again momentarily press the ESC Off switch NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved into the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur when the message was previously cleared WARNING In the ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are cancelled There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable NOTE When the ESC is switched OFF a feature of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with tire chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 WARNING With the ESC switched OFF the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The
360. ry M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter L1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Mile
361. s 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 499 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _I Rotate tires L1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center O C C C O L LL L
362. s connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Managing Your Favorite Phonebook There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite Phonebook 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phonebook from the Phone main screen then select the appropriate number Touch the next to the selected number to display the options pop up In the pop up select Add to Favorites N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 68 u EM 917 10 10 NW 54 out MEZI touch Add from Mobile You will then be asked which Pa en eet emma me contact and number to choose from your mobile phone QE book When complete the new favorite will be shown par Ir E Ana Conda W 248 123 4567 248 456 7891 D a Mohile Add to Favarites 68 4a FM91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Wo 72 Phonebook gt Favorites
363. s of the electrical charging system If the telltale stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 idle If the charging system telltale remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Telltale This telltale informs you of a problem with the al Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If the telltale comes on while driving have the sys tem checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the telltale will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The telltale should turn off If the telltale remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the telltale is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Telltale E This telltale warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatu
364. s running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 sec onds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 5 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from ap proximately 70 psi 5 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pres sure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes e The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to th
365. s will operate only when the ignition The window controls on the driver s door control all the SWitch is in the ACC or ON RUN position door windows NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect Touch the power window switches will remain active N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 for up to 60 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNINCG Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during I the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To st
366. same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the EVIC displauy It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE e You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK e The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 7 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufact
367. se only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ul 072710829 y Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 Cavity Car Mini Description Car tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Spae Red 5 40 Amp Anti Lock Brakes 25 Amp Anti Lock Brakes Green Natural Fuse Spae 25 Amp 7 Fuse Spae Natural Fuse Spare 20 Amp All Wheel Drive Module 50 Amp ES Radiator Fan 2 Yellow If Eguipped Red ENEN ENEN Fi 10 Amp Air Conditioning Clutch d 30 Amp Starter Red Pink 1 Fuse Spare BER Ed 16 8 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Power Steering 2 25 Amp Engine Module Natural Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 25 Amp Fuel Pump Natural 15 Amp Transmission Shifter Blue Fuse Spare 20 Amp Powertrain 2 Yellow 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Module Red 10 Amp Engine Controller Rad Red Fan Relays I EB 2 383 Ee ITEM Natural Kak Kak FI MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 Cae Rear Power Distributi
368. se resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light 3 The Anti Lock Brake Light monitors the anti lock brake system The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Light does not come on when the ignition switch is t
369. sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1 4 in 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle e Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses 410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the wheel road to avoid the danger of being hit when using e Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat the TIREFIT kit source Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 in 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure Continued If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage Continued NN WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 411 WARNING Continued e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed throug
370. settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e U
371. shield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNINCG Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They co
372. side of the decklid overhang The release fea Trunk Release ture w ill function only when the Button vehicle is in the unlock condition With the ignition in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed Blacafd7 With the ignition in the OFF position the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Some of the most important safety features in your Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism vehicle are the restraint systems In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attache
373. ssure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor 386 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure
374. st Party Tunes Radio will play the Genre Rock Jekyll and Mr ark 7B Hyde 030563046 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 NOTE 1 You can replace the album artist song genre playlist names on the current device that is playing 2 You can replace 8 with any track on the CD that is currently playing Command is only available when CD is playing 3 Playlist Podcast and audio book commands are only available when the iPod is connected and playing 4 VR commands Albums Artists and Genre names are based on the music database provided by Gracenote podcast and audio book names with any corresponding 5 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link commands The commands can be said on any screen when a call is nol active nfter pushing the Uconnect voice command bulton We VR on the steering wheel Screen will change to Travel Link Mavie Listings Screen will Screen will screen will change to change ta change la Travel Link Travel Link NFL Sports Favorites Haadlines Screen will Screen will Screen will change to change fo change to Travel Link Travel Link Travel Link Home Fuel Prices Weather 030563045 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 NOTE 3 You can also say Show Current Weather or Show 1 You can replace NFL with any league shown on
375. strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR
376. sty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m Change the engine oil and engine oil H Rotate tires filter L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary I Inspect the rear axle fluid Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessa
377. sure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set
378. sured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pres sure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire And Loading Information Placard Location DEERE ARES E SRA PSERIOR ERIE RE RS AT ESS RE hd MRT Ro SEER IE EVER ELIE RITS NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed dee kes Mrd d SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 1 on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 6OPSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an AN 1 09268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire
379. t heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Continued the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision 3 CARGO AREA FEATURES Trunk Mat If Equipped A trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area The trunk mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from mud snow and debris 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Cargo Tie Downs REAR WINDOW FEATURES The rear cargo area is equipped with cargo tie downs i Rear Window Defr r located on either side of the rear cargo area Ed dow Defroste The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time Cargo Tie Downs NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 CAUTION Continued CAUTION e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the
380. t position when vehicle ignition is first turned on This mode will give a sporty but comfortable ride Within this mode the suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs includ ing vehicle speed steering inputs braking and accel eration e Sport Mode This mode is driver selectable when the vehicle is placed in SPORT mode press the CON TROLS button and then the SPORT button on the Li 058341463 display screen This mode will set suspension for SPORT Mode maximum performance handling and is intended for When SPORT mode is enabled a flag will light up in the spirited driving instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Descrip tion in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for NOTE The SPORT setting will provide a firmer ride M NC NE NS TA TING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear AUTO mode will be a more soft touring ride where as SPORT will be a firmer sportier suspension for better handling SPORT mode also affects transmission shifting in either Auto or Manual mode Refer to AutoStick in Starting And Operating for further information In Auto mode the transmission has a sportier more aggres sive shift pattern In Manual mode the transmission will hold gear at redline during manual shifting shifter or paddle switches DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration o
381. t stage ensuring state of the art multi seat surround sound processing Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology deliv ers an immersive accurate sound stage to every seating position This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or dashboard AUX input and is activated through the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Surround Sound under Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 Selecting Audio Surround through the DSS modes activates the Harman Kardon Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology in your vehicle The Video Surround mode is described under Driver Selectable Surround DSS The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available in surround mode but should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045040915 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and
382. t the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter O C C C O L L L L L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 505 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order
383. t the transmission into PARK and turn the engine off When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in the PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Continued 338 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift
384. tch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However
385. te or the chime to sound de Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings n E d I The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the 819793fc instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pres sure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure inflation value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not no due received gasse a fa A E E Ms een E b E 2 LS pem WT 5 i Ex Bass ae M 81
386. te speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and CAUTION braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 TIRE CHAINS CAUTION Continued If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle use only chains that meet SAE type Class S specifica Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as tions In addition only install tire chains on 245 45ZR20 possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 size tires Contact you local authorized dealership or tire mile 0 8 km dealer for these size tires Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on rear wheels only CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions e Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important Do not
387. th Mobile Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using touch screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS e Sending a text message via the touch screen e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen e Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an ac
388. that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If EE Care equipped t he cleaned aa died _ Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric trenes Se ar eive tutto ag fe upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting leon di towel Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARS Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Appli
389. the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the amp button and say Show my incoming calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To ignore the call touch the Ignore soft key on the touch screen You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the blue caller ID box Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone e button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Sve button and say Dial or Call follo
390. the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition OFF Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 e The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings
391. the compound com mand form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver sational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command EVR button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you wa
392. the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately B Mirrors UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS O Automatic Dimming Mirror O Outside Mirrors H Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Foppe a ud sx ores SEARLE RED HE Re O Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If ERU DCE cacao oaks Oe ee DEP AR Es O Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting If Equipped O Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped O Power Mirrors 4 2 xov be SEE EN O Power Folding Outside Mirrors If EGU PE M seamen oy nae om es o Heated Mirrors If Equipped O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped O Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Visor io dee ds Oe WES dre Bang Edu ll Blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped Pied Cross Pati ssa aeneis de xp ardt don on E B Modes Of Operation 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Bl Uconnect Phone 84 84N 105 D Uconne
393. the right of the device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen name Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Make Favorite soft key you will see the e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key chosen device move to the top of the list e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook currently connected device Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text e Touch the Delete Device soft key names and number entries from the mobile phone s e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone i
394. the system off when you are not using meee c6 it 56789 mi To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the A EE SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed ACC Set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 e The system will not be controlling the distance be To Cancel tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the speed will only be determined by the position of the memory if accelerator pedal e You softly tap the brake pedal e You depress the brake pedal 3 e You press the CANCEL switch e An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs Driver Override e f the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL men s c e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys ACC 55 mph tem ESC TCS activates BS 0324439099 Driver Override 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off e You turn OFF the ignition ESC will automatically be re engaged To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed Adaptive NOTE You can resume ACC from a mini
395. ther the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling amp Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commande zan be spoken from any screen afier pushing tha Uconnect Phone outton an be Available commands while phone call is in progress steerina wheel g Temani csi bic spoken Trot ony SEER while s 48 olive iie tushay Wie Uconnect voice conmmamd bulion pn the steering whsel Shows Ihe Number Last Last associated number incoming wall list will miom Rpg il Number is Dial Tones for wih entry i5 called is call is Ls a heb ende vk 3h al dialed Dial Tones numbers stored In dialed redialed dialed Jemen xin staal ORE DE for 123406 Voiceniail stored are sent Password are numbers serit 030863306 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e You can replace John Smith with any name in your e You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls Messaging commands only work i
396. ticular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights
397. tion N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 VOICE COMMAND Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav The Uconnect Voice Command system al ti VR lows you to control your AM FM radio satel lite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and Sirius Travel Link NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Command system to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Uconnect Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses e didn t understand e I didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session with end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the
398. tion pde EE EE and to protect your paint finish Take care never to e Stone and gravel impact scratch the paint e Insects tree sap and tar e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing aa h iminish the gl hi h e Salt in the air near seacoast localities oe ey ee ee Oe ou eS ya finish e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with scratch metal and painted surfaces clear water e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu paint and decals lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Special Care e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges MS AMEN eI ECM INAIES of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear e Use MOPAR Touch U
399. tivate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021341332 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Headlights On With
400. tlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the has power available only when the ignition is placed in engine from starting the ACC or RUN position 034639996 Center Console Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 072736519 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel And Power Outlet Console Rear 2 38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw e After the use of high power draw accessories or power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still
401. to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful EVIC information by pressing the switches mounted on the The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following tures a driver interactive display that is located in the l e Radio Info instrument cluster Fuel Economy Info e Cruise Control Info ME EE ER h NW MEE 68 h Foci Economy e Digital Vehicle Speed e Trip Info ALL Ott Valede Speed Trip info e Tire Pressure e Vehicle Info Messages e Stored Warning Messages 040940914 Turn Menu OFF Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up T wheel ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Ve hicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages and sub menus DOWN Button A Press and release the DOWN button to scroll lt downward through the main menus and Ve hicle Info and Trip Inf
402. to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 515 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If y
403. ton once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOTE e When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle e The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop e The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 3 032433101 Distance Set To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving
404. ts Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Active Head Restraints AHR In the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized deal immediately To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint m 030907490 Push Button NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Rear Head Restraints The center head restraint has two positions up or down When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can
405. tures Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT button and Coolant Temp will be displayed Press the UP or DOWN button to scroll through the following information displays e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans lemperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation Messages Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu Turn Menu OFF Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button Press ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display Pressing any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the menu back Uconnect TOUCH SETTINGS The Uconnect Touch system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Hard Keys Hard Keys are located below the Uconnect Touch system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the
406. ty Car Mini Description Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse pe HEC ee Eas 2 Red Port TEE Blue EE 10 Amp Tire Pressure Monitor El sd 3 26 Fuse Spare SEE Natural gt gt 20 Amp Active Dampening 25 Amp Power Seats Yellow Module Natural 15 Amp HVAC Module Cluster Blue Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 15 Amp Ignition Switch Wireless 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats Blue Module Natural Steering Wheel 10 Amp Steering Column 10 Amp Park Assist Blind Spot Red Module Clock Red Camera 10 Amp Battery Sensor 15 Amp Cluster Rearview Red Blue Mirror Compass 10 Amp Adaptive Cruise Control Red BE EE ETE AM SJ 0 Fl 36 Fuse Spare ii 10 Amp Adaptive Front Lighting Red xe 40 a WENN 33 34 35 37 15 Amp Radio Blue 38 20 Amp Active Suspension 40 Yellow 41 2 20 Amp Power Outlet Inside Yellow Arm Rest Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 3 i 5 6 7 8 9 50 4 30 Amp Pink MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 51 20 Amp Front Heated Seats Yellow Fuse Spare 52 10 Amp Heated Cupholders Fuse Spare Red Rear
407. uch 8 4 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect Touch display 10 10 NW 54 ou n 1130 Controls Soft Key Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level ventilation Press the soft key a second time to select LO level ventilation Press the soft key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation More Ventilated Seats Soft Keys NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restrain
408. uld ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 45
409. under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is access the jack on a jack The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire 2 Continued 418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 1 Open the trunk 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap Spare Tire Fastener 4 Remove the spare tire Opening The Access Panel 5 Remove the fastener securing the jack 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419 WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the 6 Jack Fastener edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or s
410. urer on the vehicle N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi
411. urity Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 457 487 I9iSposal og ona SERE P eon Rep E 460 Appearance CATE 44 RC VY VAAR ER RR RS 466 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 17 Assist Hill Start 0 0004 361 Auto Down Power Windows 37 Auto Unlock Doors 5 42404 ctr RE hs 30 Auto Up Power Windows ixse433 9 ie ER LEEN 37 Automatic Dimming Mirror iss 26 or Remi 22 Automatic Door Locks less 30 N INDEX 521 Automate lese ie sot sa RAD REISE SE es 171 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 285 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 320 Automatic Transaxle Pera Adas eis aah oa dem MR YE 464 Automatic Transmission 335 464 465 Deine TG 3 Loses bd p E A ROS RES 465 489 Autostick 210044362468 445o e Reo N EHR 341 Fluid and Filter Changes iss Vee Ed oe 465 Puid Change as sees cece kee aceto pua 465 Fluid Level Check aua ex cum erem 294 mes 465 Pad TIU DE sei ix EAS SUPER SR 489 Dbecial ZIOOI UPS 2 2 v Ros ox mi rema eee 464 Autostick uu eue d ES d RE YE P EA ee eee ee 341 Axle Fluid dag db Ha RE eR de ed as 489 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 489 B Pillar doen usas os xy VEE HO EE 370 cnc RAAS N ET EE RE FEE 447 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 seco PP os 447 Belts e cc MENREESRTTRITCRTCETTETOTOSETOTTE 45 82 Body Mechanism Lubrication 452 Drake Assist SIE nines quos d B
412. urned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible STARTING AND OPERATING 355 If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Light remain on the ABS and EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist Sys tem BAS and the Electronic Stability Control ESC All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle is equipped with Hill Start Assist HSA Ready Alert Braking and Rain Brake Support Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ie avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilit
413. us is given for network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call
414. ushed and held rearward again Closing Power Shade Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the shade will close automatically from any position The shade will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the shade Closing Power Shade Manual Mode To close the shade press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re sult in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Wind Buffeting
415. utside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Continued NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 CAUTION Continued e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 6 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 7 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ru ON OFF 9 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribut
416. vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 WARNING CAUTION You can be badly injured working on or around a e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per motor vehicle Only do service work for which you formi pan ane Renae En necessary Goud result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or gualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed engine transmission power steering or air condi maintenance schedule there are other components which tioning Such damage is not covered by the New may reguire servicing or replacement in the future Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to
417. vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine OFF When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the engine can be turned off This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK This system also locks the shift lever in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock BTSI system that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Five Speed Automatic Transmission The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position 336 STARTING AND O
418. vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automatically disengages itself N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead 83 F NE BRAKE 032433102 Brake Alert Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part
419. vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEAR ING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch
420. vehicles equipped with rear heated seats the seats closest to the doors are heated The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI one for LO and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HI level heating Press the switch a second time to select LO level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF If the HI level heating is selected the system will auto matically switch to LO level heating after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the LO level setting also turns OFF automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera tures The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect Touch System 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Front Ventilated Seat Operation Uconnect To
421. visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Astronomy Zone System Temporarily Unavailable When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will display the message Blind spot system unavailable Astronomy zone The side mirrors LED s will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone Uconnect Phone 8 4 8 4N Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated Features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming SMS messages e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smiths Mobile e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smi
422. wed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the amp button to toggle between the active and held phone call Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the wo button or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press th
423. will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you would need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch to select the particular Phone or the Paired Audio Sources soft key and then an Audio Device e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device e Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite name e Touch the Settings soft key e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key gt EE DE ED BE e Touch the soft key located to
424. window Fa Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Continued UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 265 Mi Instrument Cluster 266 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 267 Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 277 O Electronic Vehicle Information Center ETC Di DIDI uestes m EER BR IE aoe C DE 279 B EVIC White Telltales ss 280 OEVIC Amber Telltales 281 O EVIC Red Telltales 22 222220 os 282 H Oil Change Required HP del BERG 23 23uee GENRE ROKER dea EC muse CONMOL xou Ve is ehh a E s 287 O Vehicle Speed P SE BERG BR 288 TD HMC ED 288 VPs 424854 6044 6465 ooo eno es est 289 O Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 290 Fi WiessaCes pas cen en DET gees eae sas 290 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M o Turn Menu Off ll Uconnect Touch Settings o Hard Keys O Soft Keys D Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings O SRI Performance Features ll Setting The Analog Clock ll iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped
425. witch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays ACC e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays RUN 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ie e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time WARNING Continued to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays OFF e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C transmission cannot be started this way Unburned To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once an externally powered electric engine block heater avail the engine has started ignite and damage the able from your authorized dealer is recommended converter and weld Ta vehicle has a dic If Engine Fails To Start charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING e
426. wn 030803044 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your face and shaded grey SEATS vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the belts In a collision people riding in these areas vehicle are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or Power Seats The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down forward or rearward or to Continued recline the seatback outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The passenger s seat will move up or down forward or rearward A et in 1 Seat Control 2 Seatback Control Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or pus
427. y and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels 380 STARTING AND OPERATING ee It is recommended you contact your original equipment WARNING Continued or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use Never use a tire with a smaller load index or equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the capacity other than what was originally equipped safety handling and ride of your vehicle on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure WARNING You could lose control and have an accident e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequa
428. y rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the e System Off EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate e Distance Setting Change e Driver Override e ACC Proximity Warning e ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur Clean Radar Sensor in Front of Vehicle 032433103 Clean Radar Sensor Warning NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to
429. y the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 WARNING WARNING Continued e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for e It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing on the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shif

2012 Chrysler 300 SRT8 Owner Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents